Panasonic DMR EX79 User Manual

Operating Instructions  
DVD Recorder  
Model No. DMR-EX79  
Region number supported by this  
unit  
Region numbers are allocated to DVD Recorders  
and DVD-Video according to where they are sold.  
The region number of this unit is “4”.  
The unit will play DVD-Video marked with labels  
containing “4” or “ALL”.  
Example:  
2
3
4
ALL  
4
5
Dear customer  
Thank you for purchasing this product. For optimum  
performance and safety, please read these  
instructions carefully.  
Before connecting, operating or adjusting this  
product, please read the instructions completely.  
Please keep this manual for future reference.  
This DVD recorder is for viewing and recording  
free to view channels only, not pay TV or  
encrypted channels.  
TV Guide system of this DVD recorder does not  
support analogue broadcasts.  
Trademark of the DVB Digital Video  
Broadcasting Project  
Declaration of Conformity (22nd October 2008)  
No. 5966  
About descriptions in these operating  
instructions  
Pages to be referred to are indicated as “> ±±”.  
RQT9306-L  
GN  
Table of contents  
Getting started  
Editing  
Included accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
The remote control information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Unit care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Editing titles/chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Creating, editing and playing playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Editing still pictures and music. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Copying  
Quick Start Guide  
Control reference guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Easy access to various functions —  
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
STEP 1 Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and  
TV aspect settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9  
HDD and disc information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10  
USB memory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
Regarding DivX® files, Music files and  
Copying titles or playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46  
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47  
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Copying SD Video from a video equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Copying still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Copying using the copying list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Copying still pictures on the USB memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Copying music to HDD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
About the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Copying music from a CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Copying music from a USB memory or  
still pictures (JPEG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Media handling (Disc/USB memory). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Basic operations  
To update the Gracenote® Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Watching analogue and digital broadcasts . . . . . . . . . .14  
Playing recorded video contents/  
Setting menus  
Playing play-only discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Recording television programmes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Deleting titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Using on-screen menus/Status message. . . . . . . . . . . 54  
HDD and disc management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Setting the protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Providing a name for a disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete all titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Deleting all the contents—Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Selecting the background style—Top Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Selecting whether to show the Top Menu first—  
Auto-Play Select. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Enabling discs to be played on other equipment—Finalise . . . . 58  
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Changing the unit’s settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Common procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Picture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Other Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Television operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Advanced operations  
Notes for recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
Advanced recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Recording modes and approximate recording times . . . . . . . . . 20  
When the format confirmation screen is displayed. . . . . . . . . . . 20  
When removing a recorded disc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Playing while you are recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Copying from a video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Manual recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Advanced timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Using G-CODE system to make timer recordings  
(Analogue broadcast only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Manually programming timer recordings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
To cancel recording when recording has already begun . . . . . . 24  
To release the unit from recording standby . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Relief Recording. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Check, change or delete a programme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Notes on timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
Operations in the TV Guide system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Selecting the programme from the desired programme type or  
category. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26  
Searching for the programme in the TV Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Advanced playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Operation during play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Changing audio during play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR appearance . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
To sort the titles for easy searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
To play grouped titles [HDD] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
To edit the group of titles [HDD]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG). . . .30  
Showing the menu screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Playing DivX video contents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Playing Music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Playing still pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Useful functions during still picture play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
To play music CD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
To play music recorded on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Useful functions during music play. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Convenient functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
To pause the TV programme you are watching—  
Reference  
Additional connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Connecting a television with S VIDEO terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Connecting a television with COMPONENT VIDEO  
terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Connecting an amplifier with a digital input terminal. . . . . . . . . . 67  
Connecting a stereo amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and  
receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Connecting a television and VCR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Frequently asked questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70  
Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Troubleshooting guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Panasonic Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Back Cover  
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Linked operations with the TV  
(VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Easy control only with VIERA remote control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
RQT9306  
3
Getting started  
Included accessories  
Please check and identify the supplied accessories.  
(Product numbers correct as of April 2009. These may be subject to change.)  
(N2QAYB000343)  
1
Remote control  
1
AC mains lead  
1 RF coaxial cable  
2 Batteries  
for remote control  
1 Audio/Video cable  
For use with this unit only. Do not  
use it with other equipment.  
Also, do not use cords for other  
equipment with this unit.  
The remote control information  
Batteries  
Use  
Insert the poles (i and j) so to match in the remote control.  
Remote control signal sensor  
20  
20  
R6/LR6, AA  
30  
Use alkaline or manganese batteries.  
Do not mix old and new batteries.  
30  
Do not use different types at the same time.  
Do not heat or expose to flame.  
7 m directly in front of the unit  
Do not leave the battery(ies) in an automobile exposed to direct  
sunlight for a long period of time with doors and windows closed.  
Do not take apart or short circuit.  
Do not attempt to recharge alkaline or manganese batteries.  
Do not use batteries if the covering has been peeled off.  
Mishandling of batteries can cause electrolyte leakage which can  
damage items the fluid contacts and may cause a fire.  
Remove if the remote control is not going to be used for a long  
period of time. Store in a cool, dark place.  
Remote control operations (> 6)  
Safety precautions  
Foreign matter  
Placement  
Do not let metal objects fall inside the unit. This can cause electric  
shock or malfunction.  
Do not let liquids get into the unit. This can cause electric shock or  
malfunction. If this occurs, immediately disconnect the unit from the  
power supply and contact your dealer.  
Do not spray insecticides onto or into the unit. They contain  
flammable gases which can ignite if sprayed into the unit.  
Set the unit up on an even surface away from direct sunlight, high  
temperatures, high humidity, and excessive vibration. These  
conditions can damage the cabinet and other components, thereby  
shortening the unit’s service life.  
Do not place heavy items on the unit.  
Voltage  
Do not use high voltage power sources. This can overload the unit  
and cause a fire.  
Do not use a DC power source. Check the source carefully when  
setting the unit up on a ship or other place where DC is used.  
Service  
Do not attempt to repair this unit by yourself. If sound is  
interrupted, indicators fail to light, smoke appears, or any other  
problem that is not covered in these instructions occurs, disconnect  
the AC mains lead and contact your dealer or an authorized service  
centre. Electric shock or damage to the unit can occur if the unit is  
repaired, disassembled or reconstructed by unqualified persons.  
AC mains lead protection  
Ensure the AC mains lead is connected correctly and not  
damaged. Poor connection and lead damage can cause fire or  
electric shock. Do not pull, bend, or place heavy items on the lead.  
Grasp the plug firmly when unplugging the lead. Pulling the AC  
mains lead can cause electric shock.  
Extend operating life by disconnecting the unit from the power  
source if it is not to be used for a long time.  
Do not handle the plug with wet hands. This can cause electric  
shock.  
RQT9306  
4
HDD (Hard disk drive) handling care  
The HDD is a high precision recording instrument and because of its long recording capability and high speed operation it is a very special device  
that is easily susceptible to damage.  
As a basic rule, save important content to a disc as backup.  
The HDD is a device that is not built to withstand vibration/shock or dust  
Depending on the setup environment and handling of the HDD some content may become damaged and play and recording may no longer be  
possible. Especially during operation, do not subject the unit to any vibration, shock, or remove the AC mains lead from the household mains  
socket. In the event of a power failure during recording or play, the content may be damaged.  
The HDD is a temporary storage device  
The HDD is not an everlasting storage device for recorded content. Use the HDD as a temporary storage place for one-off viewing, editing, or  
copying. It is recommended to save the recorded content on a disc or to keep the original data or CDs that they were copied from.  
Immediately save (backup) all content as soon as you feel there may be a problem with the HDD  
If there is an irregularity within the HDD, repetitive strange sounds or problems with picture (block noise, etc.) may result. Using the HDD in this  
condition may worsen the problem and in the worst case the HDD may no longer be usable. As soon as you notice this type of problem, copy all  
content to disc and request service. Recorded content (data) on a HDD that has become unusable is unrecoverable.  
When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected sound. This does not indicate a problem with this unit.  
Setup precautions  
Cigarette smoke etc. causes malfunction or  
Do not place in an enclosed area where the rear cooling fan  
and the cooling vents on the side are covered up.  
Place the unit on a surface that is flat and not subject to  
vibration or impact.  
breakdown  
The unit may breakdown if cigarette smoke or bug spray/vapor,  
etc. gets inside the unit.  
While operating  
Do not move the unit or subject to vibration or impact. (The HDD  
may become damaged.)  
Do not place on anything that  
DO NOT  
generates heat like a video cassette  
recorder, etc.  
Do not remove the AC mains lead from the household mains  
socket, or flip the power breaker switch.  
While the unit is on, the HDD is rotating at high speed. Sound or  
movement due to rotation is normal.  
Do not place in an area often subject to  
temperature changes.  
Place in an area where condensation  
This unit  
VCR  
does not occur. Condensation is a  
phenomenon where moisture forms on a  
cold surface when there is an extreme  
change in temperature. Condensation may cause internal  
damage to the unit.  
When moving the unit  
1 Turn the unit off. (Wait until “BYE” disappears from the display.)  
2 Remove the AC mains lead from the household mains socket.  
3 Move only after the unit has come to a complete stop (approx.  
2 minutes) in order to avoid subjecting to vibration and shock.  
(Even after turning the unit off, the HDD continues operating for  
a short time.)  
Conditions where condensation may occur  
– When there is an extreme change in temperature (moving from  
a very hot location to a very cold location, or vice versa, or  
when subjected to an air conditioner or when cooled air directly  
impacts the unit). When the HDD (warms during operation) is  
subjected to cold air, condensation may form on the inside of  
the HDD and may cause damage to the HDD heads, etc.  
– When there is high humidity or a lot of steam in the room.  
– During the rainy season.  
In the above situation, without turning the unit on, let the unit  
adjust to the room temperature and wait 2–3 hours until  
condensation is gone.  
HDD recording time remaining  
This unit records using a VBR (Variable bit rate) data compression system to vary recorded data segments to match video data segments which  
may cause differences in the displayed amount of time and space remaining for recording.  
If the remaining amount of time is insufficient, delete any unwanted titles to create enough space before you start recording. (Deleting a playlist  
will not increase the amount of time.)  
Indemnity concerning recorded content  
Panasonic does not accept any responsibility for damages directly or indirectly due to any type of problems that result in loss of recording or  
edited content (data), and does not guarantee any content if recording or editing does not work properly. Likewise, the above also applies in a  
case where any type of repair is made to the unit (including any other non-HDD related component).  
Unit care  
The precision parts in this unit are readily affected by the  
environment, especially temperature, humidity, and dust.  
Cigarette smoke also can cause malfunction or breakdown.  
DO NOT  
Do not place the unit on  
amplifiers or equipment  
that may become hot.  
The heat can damage the unit.  
To clean this unit, wipe with a soft, dry cloth.  
Never use alcohol, paint thinner or benzine to clean this unit.  
Before using chemically treated cloth, carefully read the  
instructions that came with the cloth.  
Observe the following points to ensure continued listening and  
viewing pleasure.  
Dust and dirt may adhere to the unit’s lens over time, making it  
impossible to record or play discs.  
Use the DVD lens cleaner (not included) about once every year,  
depending on frequency of use and the operating environment.  
Carefully read the lens cleaner’s instructions before use.  
Note  
Do not obstruct the rear panel’s internal cooling fan.  
Before moving the unit, ensure the disc tray is empty.  
Failure to do so will risk severely damaging the disc and the  
unit.  
DVD lens cleaner: RP-CL720E  
This lens cleaner may not be for sale depending on the region.  
RQT9306  
5
Quick Start  
Guide  
Control reference guide  
Remote control  
Instructions for operations are generally described using the remote control.  
1 Turn the unit on (> 9)  
2 Select drive [HDD or DVD] (> 15, 16)  
Drive changes each time you press [DRIVE SELECT].  
3 Select channels and title numbers, etc./Enter numbers  
4 To delete unwanted recorded titles, timer programmes, still  
pictures or music (> 18, 25, 43)  
5 Basic operations for recording and play  
6 Show digital channel information (> 14)/Programme information  
within TV Guide screen (> 26)/Show status messages (> 55)  
7 Selection/OK, Frame-by-frame (> 28)  
8 Show DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 29, 38)  
9 Show OPTION menu (> 27, 38)  
TV  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
PAGE  
CH  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
for playing or editing titles and still pictures, etc.  
for searching for programmes  
: Select audio (For playback and analogue broadcast) (> 28)  
; Colour buttons  
ANALOGUE  
CH  
for TV Guide operations (> 26)  
8 9  
0
7
for switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 29, 32, 34)  
for switching VIDEO/Playlists (> 47)  
for deactivating timer programme (> 24)  
for tuning settings (> 59)  
G-Code  
DELETE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
< Show on-screen menu (> 54)  
Menu for disc playback and changing DVB multi audio etc.  
= Recording functions  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
STOP  
[¥ REC] Start recording (> 16)  
[REC MODE] Change recording mode (> 16)  
> Transmit the remote control signal  
? Television operations (> 65)  
@ Channel select/Change pages in the TV Guide system  
(> 16, 26)  
A Select analogue channel (> 16)  
STATUS  
EXIT  
I
B Input select (AV1, AV2, AV3, AV4 or DV) (> 22)  
C Show G-CODE screen (> 23)  
D Exit the menu screen  
OK  
E Show the TV Guide screen (> 17, 26)  
F Show FUNCTION MENU Display (> 35)  
By using the FUNCTION MENU Display you may access the  
main functions (Playback, Recording, etc.) quickly and easily.  
G Return to previous screen  
OPTION  
RETURN  
CREATE  
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
REC  
CHAPTER  
MANUAL SKIP  
H Create chapter (> 28)  
I Skip approx. 1 minute forward (> 28)  
J Show Timer Recording screen (> 23)  
K Skip the specified time (> 28)  
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK  
The unit’s display  
REC  
PLAY  
1 Digital broadcast indicator  
Lights when the unit is receiving digital broadcast.  
2 Copying indicator  
3 Recording/Playback indicator  
Recording/Playback  
indicator  
Recording indicator  
Playback  
indicator  
REC  
REC  
PLAY  
PLAY  
4 Timer recording indicator  
5 Disc indicator  
6 Drive [HDD or DVD] indicator  
7 Main display section indicator  
8 Recording mode indicator  
RQT9306  
6
Main unit  
  
  
  
  
  
  
REC  
   
   
  
Pull to flip down the front  
panel.  
REC  
1 Standby/on switch (Í/I) (> 9)  
7 USB port (> 13)  
Press to switch the unit from on to standby mode or vice versa. In  
standby mode, the unit is still consuming a small amount of  
power.  
8 Stop (> 16, 28)  
9 Start play (> 15)  
: Channel select (> 16)  
; Start recording (> 16)/Specify a time to stop recording (> 16)  
< Remote control signal sensor  
2 Disc tray (> 13)  
3 Connection for digital video (DV) camcorder (> 22)  
4 Connection for VCR, camcorder etc. (> 22)  
5 Display (> 6)  
6 Open/Close disc tray (> 13)  
Rear panel terminals (> 8, 66, 67, 68, 69)  
Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION MENU Display  
“FUNCTION MENU” automatically appears when you turn the power on. (When “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu)  
You can access the main function quickly and easily.  
Select when you wish to  
playback the contents. The  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
screen or menu screen etc.  
will be displayed.  
1Playback  
1
Video (> 15, 29)  
DivX (> 30)  
Picture (> 32)  
Music (> 31)  
Top Menu (> 15)  
Menu (> 15)  
Press [OK].  
Select a function.  
Selectable items are  
displayed on the right.  
Select the recording method.  
2Recording  
Timer Recording (> 17, 23)  
G-Code Record (> 23)  
Select the title or file type you  
wish to delete. The DELETE  
Navigator screen will be  
displayed.  
3Delete  
FUNCTION MENU  
Video (> 18)  
Picture (> 43)  
Music (> 43)  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
Playback  
Recording  
Delete  
Video  
Picture  
Music  
Select the copy method.  
4Copy  
Video (HDD to DVD) (> 46)  
Advanced Copy (> 47)  
Copy Music CD (> 52)  
Copy Music (> 52)  
Copy  
TV Guide  
Others  
Select when you wish to  
watch or record a  
programme. The TV Guide  
will be displayed.  
5TV Guide (> 17, 26)  
Drive Select  
OK  
RETURN  
Select and execute a  
function other than those  
above, such as recording or  
setting.  
6Others  
Playlists (> 40)  
Flexible Rec (> 21)  
DV Auto Rec (> 22)  
HDD Management (> 56)  
DVD Management (> 56)  
Setup (> 59)  
2
Change which drive is used.  
7Drive Select  
HDD  
DVD  
USB  
Press [OK].  
Select an item.  
Note  
If you do not need to display FUNCTION MENU when turning the  
unit on, set “FUNCTION MENU Display” to “Off” in the Setup menu  
(> 62).  
RQT9306  
7
STEP 1 Connection  
Before connection, turn off all equipment and read the appropriate operating instructions.  
Refer to “Additional connections” (> 66) for connection using other terminals and connection with other equipment.  
When the unit is not to be used for a long time  
To save power, unplug it from the household  
mains socket. This unit consumes a small  
amount of power, even when it is turned off  
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal  
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the 21-pin Scart cable.  
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by connecting with a fully  
wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video using RGB output on this unit.  
[approx. 2 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)]  
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 63)  
Required setting  
Connecting a television  
To household mains socket  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
Connect to terminals of the same colour.  
Television’s rear panel  
To the aerial  
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
R
L
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
AC mains lead  
(included)  
2
Other connections  
(> below, 66)  
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
3
1 2  
4
Cooling fan  
RF  
IN  
Y
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BIITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
Aerial cable  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
You can enjoy high-quality picture by changing the connection between this unit and your TV as follows.  
Connecting to a TV with an HDMI (High Definition Multimedia Interface) cable  
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital  
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to  
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.  
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology.  
Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,  
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.  
Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).  
When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.  
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function  
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.  
[> 36, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]  
Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.  
It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.  
Recommended part number:  
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.  
Required setting  
Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and  
Optical” (> 63).  
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)  
Television’s rear panel  
HDMI IN  
HDMI cable  
RF  
IN  
Y
HDMI AV OUT  
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
This unit’s  
rear panel  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BBITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
Note  
If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 81) and  
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)  
You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.  
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input  
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):  
RQT9306  
Depending on the unit, images may not be displayed properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be  
output.)  
8
STEP 2 Channel reception settings and TV aspect settings  
The features of the power save function when the unit is in  
standby mode are as below.  
On§1  
Approx. 2 W  
Not Quick  
Cannot do  
Power Save  
Off  
Approx. 15 W  
Quick§2  
TV  
Í
Í
DRIVE  
SELECT  
Í
Power consumption  
Startup time  
VOL  
CH  
AV  
PAGE  
CH  
Watching the picture  
from the device  
connected to AV2  
Can do  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
Numbered  
buttons  
§1  
ANALOGUE  
CH  
“FL Display” is set to “Automatic” in the Setup menu.  
8 9  
0
7
(> 62)  
G-Code  
DELETE  
INPUT  
§2  
It is possible to startup and start recording within several  
seconds.  
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
Depending on the type of TV or the connected terminal, it  
may take time to display the screen.  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
EXIT  
STOP  
If the TV aspect setting screen appears on the television  
STATUS  
TV Aspect  
I
16:9 WIDE TV  
16:9  
4:3 TV  
OK  
Pan & Scan  
3,4,2,1  
Letterbox  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
SELECT  
RETURN  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
MANUAL SKIP  
OK  
RETURN  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the TV aspect  
1 Turn on the television and select the  
and press [OK].  
appropriate AV input to suit the  
connections to this unit.  
16:9:  
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television  
Pan & Scan:  
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.  
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television,  
side picture is trimmed for 16:9 picture  
(> 81).  
When connecting to a television that has the VIERA Link  
functions (> 36), downloading from the television starts.  
You can download the tuning positions from the television for  
the channels in this unit’s channel coverage.  
Letterbox:  
DVB Auto Setup starts.  
The unit will search for the terrestrial digital channels.  
This takes 5 minutes.  
When connected to a 4:3 aspect television.  
16:9 picture is shown in the letterbox style  
(> 81).  
DVB Auto Setup  
When television picture appears, set up is complete.  
Scan  
CH  
1
CH 6  
69  
Type Quality  
Channel Name  
When clock setting screen is displayed  
ABC  
ABC 2  
TV  
Data  
9
9
2
In step 3, if the clock setting screen appears on the television, set  
the clock manually.  
This is a 24-hour clock.  
TV : 1  
Radio : 0  
Data : 1  
Searching...  
RETURN  
Clock  
Terrestrial digital channels are stored into logical channel  
numbers.  
Analogue channels are preset at the time of shipping. If you  
would like to add new TV channels, set them manually  
(> 60).  
Time  
0
Date  
1
:
00  
:
00  
.
1
.
2009  
Number  
0
9
Please set the clock.  
OK: access RETURN: leave  
CHANGE  
OK  
DVB Auto Setup is complete when Region Selection screen  
appears.  
SELECT  
RETURN  
1
2
Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change and press  
[3, 4] to change the setting.  
The items change as follows:  
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year  
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J  
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.  
Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select your region  
and press [OK].  
The time information for your region can be obtained.  
Region Selection  
NSW / ACT  
Victoria  
Power Save setting screen appears.  
(> Go to step 4)  
Queensland  
South Australia  
Western Australia  
Northern Territory  
SELECT  
To stop partway  
Press [RETURN ].  
Tasmania  
OK  
RETURN  
If the clock setting screen is displayed (> right)  
To confirm that stations have been tuned  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “On” or “Off”  
and press [OK] when the “Power  
Save” setting menu appears.  
correctly (> 60)  
To restart set up (> 59)  
Power Save  
On  
Off  
On : Minimises standby power  
consumption, disables Quick  
Start function. FL Display is  
set to "Automatic".  
On:  
It will go into the Power Save mode when the unit  
is in standby condition.  
RQT9306  
Off: It is possible to start quickly from the standby  
9
mode. (Quick Start mode)  
HDD and disc information  
HDD and discs you can use for recording and play  
(: Possible, –: Impossible)  
Disc type  
Logo  
Data that can Rewritable Play on other Recording 16:9 Recording both M 1  
Copy-once  
recording  
(CPRM)  
players§1  
aspect picture§2  
be recorded  
and played  
and M 2 for bilingual  
broadcasts§2  
Standard symbol  
Hard disk drive (HDD)  
Video  
Still picture  
Music  
[HDD]  
DVD-RAM  
[RAM]  
Video  
Still picture  
CPRM (> 81)  
compatible discs  
only.  
§3  
Video§5  
or  
DVD-R  
[-R] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
(Video only)  
(Either one)  
5
Still picture§  
§3  
DVD-R DL§4  
Video  
[-R]DL] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
(Either one)  
§3  
DVD-RW  
[-RW‹V›] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
Video  
Video  
Video  
Video  
(Either one)  
§3  
+R  
– (4:3 aspect)  
– (4:3 aspect)  
– (4:3 aspect)  
[+R] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
+R DL§4  
[+R]DL] before finalisation  
[DVD-V] after finalisation  
(Either one)  
§3  
(Either one)  
§3  
+RW  
[+RW]  
(Either one)  
§1  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Note  
Finalisation is needed for playback on other equipment (> 58).  
[RAM] can be played back on Panasonic DVD recorders and  
DVD-RAM compatible DVD players.  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”, the restrictions on  
secondary audio recording are also applied to DVD-RAM. Turn this  
setting “Off” if high speed copy to [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[+RW] is not necessary (The default setting is “On”. > 61).  
+R discs recorded with this unit and +R discs recorded with  
another Panasonic DVD Recorder may be incompatible. However,  
discs that are finalised are compatible and can be played.  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have  
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can  
be recorded onto the HDD.)  
[-R]DL], [+R]DL] or [+RW] can be played back only on equipment  
compatible with these discs.  
For further information (> 19, Notes for recording)  
The audio selected in “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 62) is  
recorded.  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] You cannot directly record to these discs (> right).  
[-R] Videos and still pictures cannot be mixed on one disc.  
§2  
§3  
§4  
§5  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is  
necessary (> 57).  
[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend  
you create top menu (> 58).  
You may not be able to record depending on the condition of the  
discs and you may not be able to play due to the condition of the  
recording.  
Use of Panasonic discs is recommended.  
For available recording times for different discs under different  
recording modes, see “Recording modes and approximate  
recording times” (> 20).  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL  
disc on this unit.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
Formatting and/or recording/initializing constraints may prevent  
you from playing or recording certain discs.  
Please see specifications (> 80) for compatible disc versions and  
recording speeds.  
When playing DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and  
+R DL (Double Layer, single-sided)  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer, single-sided) and +R DL (Double Layer,  
single-sided) discs have two writable layers on one side. If there is  
not enough space on the first layer to record a programme, the  
remainder is recorded on the second layer. When playing a title  
recorded on both layers, the unit automatically switches between  
layers and plays the title in the same way as a normal programme.  
However, video and audio may momentarily cut out when the unit  
is switching layers.  
Recording format  
This unit records video in the following formats.  
DVD Video Recording format [HDD] [RAM]  
This is a recording method which allows you to record and edit  
television broadcasts and so on.  
You can delete unwanted parts of a title, create playlists, etc.  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” can be  
recorded to a CPRM compatible disc.  
DVD-R DL  
When switching layers:  
Video and audio may momentarily cut  
+R DL  
DVD-Video format [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
This recording method is the same as commercially available DVD-  
Video.  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be  
recorded even if using a CPRM compatible disc.  
After finalising the disc, you can play the disc on DVD players and  
other equipment.  
Second recordable layer  
The available space  
First recordable layer  
+VR (+R/+RW Video Recording) format [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
This is a method for recording moving pictures to +R/+RW discs.  
You can playback such discs recorded in this method in a similar  
way as contents recorded in the DVD-Video format.  
The broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” cannot be  
recorded.  
Title 1  
Title 2  
(Inner section of  
(Outer section  
of the disc)  
Playback direction  
the disc)  
After finalising the disc or creating the top menu, you can play the  
disc on DVD players and other equipment.  
RQT9306  
10  
Play-only discs  
Disc type  
Logo  
Standard symbol  
Uses  
High quality movie and music discs  
DVD-Video  
[DVD-V]  
DVD-RW (DVD  
Video  
Recording  
format)  
[-RW‹VR›]  
DVD-RW video recorded on another DVD recorder  
You can play programmes that allow One time only recording if they  
have been recorded onto a CPRM compatible disc.  
By formatting (  
>
57) the disc, you can record onto it in DVD-Video format.  
It may be necessary to finalise the disc on the equipment used for recording.  
DVD-R  
DVD-R DL  
DivX/MP3/WMA/ DVD-R and DVD-R DL with video recorded in DivX  
JPEG  
DVD-R and DVD-R DL with music recorded in MP3/WMA  
DVD-R and DVD-R DL with still pictures recorded in JPEG  
Recorded audio and music (including CD-R/RW§)  
CD  
[CD]  
DivX/MP3/WMA/ CD-R and CD-RW with video recorded in DivX  
JPEG  
CD-R and CD-RW with music recorded in MP3/WMA  
CD-R and CD-RW with still pictures recorded in JPEG  
Recorded music and video (including CD-R/RW§)  
Video CD  
[VCD]  
§
Close the session after recording. Play may be impossible on some discs due to the condition of the recording.  
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you may not always be able to control play as described in these operating  
instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.  
Operation and sound quality of CDs that do not conform to CD-DA specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.  
Types of disc or title recorded on HDD  
for the type of connected TV  
Discs that cannot be played  
2.6 and 5.2 GB DVD-RAM, 12 cm  
3.95 and 4.7 GB DVD-R for Authoring  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL recorded on another unit  
and not finalised (> 81).  
Discs recorded with AVCHD format.  
DVD-Video with a region number other than “4” or “ALL”  
DVD-Audio  
Blu-ray, HD DVD  
DVD-ROM, +R (8 cm), CD-ROM, CDV, CD-G, Photo CD, CVD,  
SVCD, SACD, MV-Disc, PD, etc.  
When you use the discs recorded either PAL or NTSC, or playback a  
title recorded on HDD using PAL or NTSC, refer to this table.  
(: Possible to view, –: Impossible to view)  
TV type  
Disc/Titles recorded  
on HDD  
Yes/No  
Multi-system TV  
PAL  
NTSC  
PAL  
PAL TV  
§1 (PAL60)  
NTSC  
PAL  
NTSC TV  
§2  
NTSC  
§1  
If your television is not equipped to handle PAL 525/60 signals  
the picture will not be shown correctly.  
Select “NTSC” in “TV System” (> 63).  
§2  
When playing back a disc or title recorded on the HDD, ensure that  
you match the “TV System” setting to the disc or title (PAL or  
NTSC) (> 63).  
USB memory information  
Compatible USB memories  
USB memories which are defined as USB mass storage class, and digital cameras that use PTP protocol:  
USB memories that support USB 1.0/1.1 and USB 2.0 Full Speed/High Speed.  
USB memories of up to 128 GB can be used.  
USB memories that support bulk only transfer.  
CBI (Control/Bulk/Interrupt) is not supported.  
Digital Cameras which require additional programme installation when connected to a PC are not supported.  
MTP (Media Transport Protocol) device is not supported.  
A multi-port USB card reader is not supported.  
Format  
FAT16 and FAT32 file systems are supported.  
UDF/NTFS/exFAT file system is not supported.  
Depending on the sector size, some files may not work.  
Only the first partition on USB memories with multi-partition is supported.  
Indicated in these instructions by [USB]  
Data that can be played or copied  
File format  
(: Possible, –: Impossible)  
DivX  
MP3/WMA  
Still pictures (JPEG)  
Playing  
Copying to HDD  
Instructions  
You can play DivX files recorded You can play and copy to HDD MP3/ You can play and copy to HDD or DVD-  
with a computer onto the USB  
WMA files recorded with a computer RAM still pictures recorded with a computer  
onto the USB memory ( 31, 52). onto the USB memory ( 32, 51).  
memory (> 30).  
>
>
Despite meeting the conditions mentioned above, there may be USB memories that cannot be used for this unit.  
If a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc. is connected to this unit’s USB port, you can copy the SD Video recorded with the camera to  
this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.  
RQT9306  
Note  
11  
This unit’s USB port does not support bus-powered USB device.  
Regarding DivX® files, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]  
DivX  
Compatible formats: ISO9660 level 1 or 2 (except for extended  
formats) and Joliet  
Playable  
media  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
This unit is compatible with multi-session/border (except for DVD-  
R DL), but reading or play of the disc may take time if there are a  
lot of sessions.  
Operation may take time to complete when there are many files  
(tracks) and/or folders (groups or albums) and some files (tracks)  
may not display or be playable.  
File format  
DivX  
Files must have the extension  
“.DIVX”, “.divx”, “.AVI” or “.avi”.  
English alphabet and Arabic numerals are displayed correctly.  
Other characters may not be displayed correctly.  
The display order on this unit may differ from how the order is  
displayed on a computer.  
Depending on how you create the disc (writing software), files  
(tracks) and folders (groups or albums) may not play in the order  
you numbered them.  
This unit is not compatible with packet-write format.  
Depending on the recording conditions, the disc may not be  
played.  
This unit is not compatible with copy-protected, Lossless,  
Professional, Voice and Multiple Bit Rate (MBR) for WMA.  
This unit is not compatible with WMA files protected with digital  
rights management (DRM).  
Number of  
folders  
Maximum number of folders recognizable: 300  
folders  
(including the root folder)  
Maximum number of files recognizable§1: 200 files  
Number of  
files  
Support  
version  
Certified to the DivX Home Theater Profile.  
Video  
Number of stream: Up to 1  
Codec: DIV3, DIV4, DIVX, DV50  
Picture size: 32 x 32 to 720 x 576  
FPS (Frame Per Second): Up to 30 fps  
Audio  
Number of stream: Up to 8  
Format: MP3, MPEG, Dolby Digital  
Multi channel: Dolby Digital is possible. MPEG  
multi is 2 ch conversion.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Compatible formats: DCF§4 compliant (Content recorded on a  
digital camera, etc.)  
§4  
Design rule for Camera File system: unified standard established  
MP3/WMA  
by Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries  
Association (JEITA).  
Playable  
media  
[HDD] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
Structure of folders displayed by this unit  
File format  
MP3  
You can play Music files (MP3/WMA) and still pictures (JPEG)  
on this unit by making folders as shown below. However  
depending on the method of writing data (writing software),  
play may not be in the order you numbered the folders.  
Files must have the extension “.mp3” or “.MP3”.  
WMA (Windows Media-formatted file)  
Files must have the extension “.wma” or “.WMA”.  
Number of  
folders  
(groups or  
albums)  
Maximum number of folders (groups or albums)  
recognizable: 300 folders (groups or albums)  
(including the root folder)  
Structure of WMA/MP3  
folders  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
Prefix with 3-digit numbers in  
the order you want to play  
them.  
e.g. Structure of MP3 folders  
Root  
(folder=group)  
001  
Maximum number of files (tracks) recognizable§1  
3000 files (tracks)  
:
Number of  
files (tracks)  
(file=track)  
001.mp3  
002.mp3  
003.mp3  
Bit rates  
(MP3)  
32 kbps to 320 kbps  
The file name extension of  
002  
WMA files will be “.wma”.  
001.mp3  
002.mp3  
003.mp3  
004.mp3  
003  
Sampling  
frequency  
(MP3)  
16 kHz/22.05 kHz/24 kHz/32 kHz/44.1kHz/48 kHz  
001.mp3  
002.mp3  
003.mp3  
For WMA  
This unit is compatible with Windows Media Audio 9  
(WMA9).  
Order of play  
Structures of still picture folders  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
ID3 tags  
WMA tags  
compatible ([HDD] [USB])  
Files inside a folder are  
displayed in the order they  
were updated or taken.  
Root  
P0000001.jpg  
P0000002.jpg  
If there is a large amount of still picture data etc. within a MP3/  
WMA file, play may not be possible.  
002 Folder  
Still pictures (JPEG§2  
)
P0000003.jpg  
P0000004.jpg  
P0000005.jpg  
Playable  
media  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
003 Folder  
File format  
File format: JPEG  
Files must have the extension “.jpg” or “.JPG”.  
P0000006.jpg  
P0000007.jpg  
P0000008.jpg  
P0000009.jpg  
Number of  
pixels  
Between 34k34 and 6144k4096  
(Sub sampling is 4:2:2 or 4:2:0)  
004 Folder  
P0000010.jpg  
P0000011.jpg  
P0000012.jpg  
Order of play  
Number of  
folders§3  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of folders  
recognizable: 300 folders (including the root folder)  
[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 300  
folders  
[RAM]  
The following  
can be displayed on this unit.  
¢¢¢: Numbers XXX: Letters  
Number of  
files§3  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Maximum number of files  
recognizable§1: 3000 files  
[HDD] [RAM] This unit can handle a maximum of 3000  
files  
§1  
Still pictures on the root  
Root  
1  
folder can also be  
displayed.  
Folders can be created  
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG  
JPEG  
§2  
DCIMꢀꢀꢀ  
on other equipment.  
However, these folders  
cannot be selected as a  
copying destination.  
MOTION  
JPEG  
Not supported  
ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX  
PROGRESSIVE  
JPEG  
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG  
If a folder name or file  
name has been input using  
other equipment, the name  
may not be displayed  
properly or you may not be  
able to play or edit the  
data.  
§1  
Total number of recognizable file including MP3, WMA, JPEG,  
DivX and other types of files is 4000.  
It may take a few moments for still pictures to display.  
When there are many files and/or folders, some files may not  
display or be playable.  
2  
DCIM  
§2  
ꢀꢀꢀXXXXX  
XXXXꢀꢀꢀꢀ.JPG  
§3  
RQT9306  
12  
Media handling (Disc/USB memory)  
Inserting discs  
Disc care  
1 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to open the tray.  
How to hold a disc  
Do not touch the recorded surface.  
Cartridge disc  
Insert label-up with the arrow  
facing in.  
Insert label-up.  
DO  
DO NOT  
Concerning non-cartridge discs  
Be careful about scratches and dirt.  
Insert fully.  
2 Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] to close the tray.  
If there is dirt or condensation on the disc  
Automatic drive select function  
Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.  
[RAM] [Only for discs with the write-protect tab on the cartridge set to  
“PROTECT” (> 56, Cartridge-protection)]  
[DVD-V] [VCD]  
DO  
DO NOT  
If the unit is recording to the HDD or stopped, it automatically  
switches to the DVD drive when a disc is inserted.  
If you eject a disc and close the disc tray, the HDD drive is  
automatically selected.  
Handling precautions  
Do not attach labels or stickers to discs. (This may cause disc  
warping and un-balanced rotation, rendering it unusable.)  
Write on the label side of the disc only with a soft, oil-based felt  
pen. Do not use ballpoint pens or other hard writing implements.  
Do not use record cleaning sprays, benzine, thinner, static  
electricity prevention liquids or any other solvent.  
Do not use scratch-proof protectors or covers.  
Do not drop stack, or impact discs. Do not place objects on them.  
Do not use the following discs:  
Note  
When using 8 cm DVD-RAM, or 8 cm DVD-R, remove the disc  
from the cartridge.  
[RAM] It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side  
of a double sided disc to the other. You will need to eject the disc  
and turn it over.  
[RAM] When using cartridge discs with the write-protect tab in the  
protect position (> 56), play automatically starts when inserted in  
the unit.  
Discs with exposed adhesive from removed stickers or labels  
(rental discs, etc.).  
Discs that are badly warped or cracked.  
Inserting, removing the USB memory  
Irregularly shaped discs, such as heart  
shapes.  
DO NOT  
Inserting the USB memory  
Before inserting any USB memory to  
this unit, ensure that the data stored  
therein has been backed up.  
Check the orientation of the USB  
connector and insert it straight in.  
Insert an USB device while the unit is  
stopped, so the “USB device” screen is  
displayed. Select an item and press  
[OK] to switch to the USB-related operations (> 30, 51).  
Removing the USB memory  
Complete all USB-related operations and pull the USB memory  
straight out.  
Do not place in the following areas:  
In direct sunlight.  
In very dusty or humid areas.  
Near a heater.  
Locations susceptible to significant difference in temperature  
(condensation can occur).  
Where static electricity or electromagnetic waves occur.  
To protect discs from scratches and dirt, return them to their cases  
or cartridges when you are not using them.  
If a USB memory being accessed is pulled out, then the data may  
be damaged.  
The manufacturer accepts no responsibility and offers no  
compensation for loss of recorded or edited material due to a  
problem with the unit or recordable media, and accepts no  
responsibility and offers no compensation for any  
subsequent damage caused by such loss.  
Examples of causes of such losses are  
A disc recorded and edited with this unit is played in a DVD  
Recorder or computer disc drive manufactured by another  
company.  
A disc used as described above and then played again in this  
unit.  
A disc recorded and edited with a DVD Recorder or computer  
disc drive manufactured by another company is played in this  
unit.  
RQT9306  
13  
Basic operations  
Watching analogue and digital broadcasts  
This DVD recorder has a tuner which allows it to  
directly receive and record analogue and digital  
terrestrial channels.  
Digital channel information  
While stopped  
Press [STATUS ] to show the information  
screen.  
Progress of the current  
programme  
Programme  
name  
REC  
Signal Quality (> below)  
Current time  
Station Name  
Channel  
CH  
Category  
352 ABC2  
No Signal  
All Channels  
18:53  
TV  
Change the  
category  
(> 59).  
ABC News  
Change Favourite  
19:00 - 19:30  
NOW  
info  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
Encrypted PG Multi Audio  
PAGE  
CH  
2 3  
1
Programme is broadcast in multi-  
channel sound (> 55, DVB Multi Audio)  
Numbered  
buttons  
CH  
4 5 6  
Broadcast  
time  
ANALOGUE  
CH  
The parental ratings level is displayed.  
8 9  
0
7
ANALOGUE  
CH  
During scrambled broadcasting  
(Cannot be viewed with this unit.)  
G-Code  
DELETE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
To switch information of the current programme and the next  
programme  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
STOP  
Press [2, 1].  
STATUS  
EXIT  
To show detailed information about the programme  
STATUS  
I
Press [STATUS ] again (only when “info ” is displayed).  
To hide the information screen  
Press [STATUS ] once or twice.  
OK  
,,,  
OK  
Signal Quality  
OPTION  
RETURN  
No Signal:  
The digital broadcast signal is not being received.  
CREATE  
DISPLAY  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
MANUAL SKIP  
No Service: No broadcasts are currently available.  
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK  
If “No Signal” is displayed:  
Adjust the position and direction of the aerial.  
Check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly  
broadcasting.  
Select the channel  
Note  
1 Turn on the television and select the  
You can also select the other channel when the information screen is  
displayed by pressing [3, 4] and [OK].  
appropriate AV input to suit the  
connections to this unit.  
If New Channel Message appears  
When a DVB channel is added, this unit will be informed  
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you  
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings  
are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also  
cancelled.)  
2 Press [Í] to turn the unit on.  
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.  
Everytime you change the station, digital channel information  
appears automatically (terrestrial digital channels only).  
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,  
and then followed by analogue channels.  
New Channel  
A new DVB Channel has been found.  
Start DVB Auto-Setup?  
Selecting DVB Auto-Setup will delete  
all Timer Programmes.  
Digital channel  
REC  
Yes  
No  
RETURN  
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.  
OK  
e.g., 5:  
15:  
115:  
[0] > [0] > [5]  
[0] > [1] > [5]  
[1] > [1] > [5]  
The display/hide setting can be changed (> 62, New Channel  
Message).  
Analogue channel  
REC  
You can also select the channel with the following steps.  
1
2
Press [ANALOGUE CH].  
Press the numbered buttons to select the channel.  
e.g., 5:  
15:  
[0] > [5]  
[1] > [5]  
[Note] (Digital broadcast only)  
This unit can receive Standard Definition (SD) broadcasts, but is  
unable to receive High Definition (HD) broadcasts.  
When High Definition (HD) programmes are broadcast, “Unable to  
decode HD” is displayed in the digital channel information  
(> right).  
This unit can receive free cable television but it cannot receive paid  
services.  
RQT9306  
14  
Playing recorded video contents/Playing play-only discs  
Refer to “Advanced playback” (> 28) for detail  
When a menu screen appears on the television  
information.  
[DVD-V]  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item and press [OK].  
Some items can also be selected using the numbered buttons.  
If you are instructed to press the “ENTER” button by the menu  
screen or the disc’s instruction document, press [OK].  
OPEN/CLOSE  
REC  
[VCD]  
Press the numbered buttons to select the item.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] > [5]  
15:  
[1] > [5]  
   
To return to the menu screen  
[DVD-V]  
TV  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or “Menu” and press [OK].  
DRIVE  
VOL  
CH  
SELECT  
AV  
[VCD]  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
PAGE  
Press [RETURN ].  
2 3  
1
CH  
Numbered  
buttons  
Note  
4 5 6  
Discs continue to rotate while menus are displayed. Press [] when  
you have finished playback to protect the unit’s motor, your  
television screen and so on.  
ANALOGUE  
CH  
8 9  
7
G-Code  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
STOP  
  
(PLAY)  
STATUS  
EXIT  
I
OK  
,,,  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
OPTION  
CREATE  
DISPLAY  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
MANUAL SKIP  
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
Turn on this unit.  
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
HDD or DVD drive.  
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.  
2
If you selected the DVD drive  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main  
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.  
Press the button again to close the tray.  
3 Press [1] (PLAY).  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Play starts from the most recently recorded title.  
[DVD-V] [VCD]  
Play starts from the point specified by the disc.  
[CD]  
Play starts from the beginning of the disc.  
Menu operation for other type of contents  
DivX (> 30)  
MP3/WMA (> 31)  
Still pictures (JPEG) (> 32)  
Music on HDD (> 34)  
Music CD (> 34)  
Note  
A title recorded on the HDD with different TV system cannot be  
played with the setting as is. A disc with different TV system may  
not be also played with the setting as is, only when recording or on  
standby for the timer recording.  
In those cases, you will be able to playback by changing the “TV  
System” settings. But to prevent the failure of the timer recording,  
change back the settings before the recording starts. (> 63)  
Depending on the disc, it may take time for the menu screen,  
pictures, sound, etc. to start.  
The producer of the disc can control how discs are played. So you  
may not always be able to control play as described in these  
operating instructions. Read the disc’s instructions carefully.  
RQT9306  
15  
Recording television programmes  
Refer to “Notes for recording” (  
>
19) and “Advanced  
4 Press [REC MODE] to select the  
recording” ( 20) for detail information.  
>
recording mode (XP, SP, LP or EP).  
OPEN/CLOSE  
Recording modes and approximate recording times (> 20)  
To record sound using  
LPCM (XP mode only):  
Set the “Audio Mode for XP  
Recording” to “LPCM” in  
the Setup menu (> 62).  
Recording Mode  
REC  
Rec Mode  
XP  
Remain  
47:47  
95:34  
191:11  
381:16  
SP  
CH REC  
LP  
EP  
TV  
S
ELECT  
VOL  
CH  
5 Press [¥ REC] to start recording.  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE  
PAGE  
SELECT  
REC  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
CH  
Numbered  
buttons  
CH  
Recording will take place on open space on the HDD or on  
disc. Data will not be overwritten.  
You cannot change the channel or recording mode during  
recording.  
ANALOGUE  
CH  
8 9  
7
ANALOGUE  
G-Code  
DELETE  
INPUT  
CH  
0
SELECT  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
You can record while the unit is in standby for timer  
recording. However, once the time for the timer recording to  
begin is reached, any recording taking place will stop and  
the timer recording will begin.  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
STOP  
STATUS  
EXIT  
[HDD] [RAM] (Analogue broadcast only) When “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” is set to “Off” (> 61), you can change the  
audio being received by pressing [AUDIO] during recording.  
(Does not affect the recording of audio.)  
I
OK  
[USB] It is not possible to record on a USB memory.  
Video will not be recorded to DVD-R discs which include JPEG  
images.  
OPTION  
RETURN  
CREATE  
DISPLAY  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
REC  
MANUAL SKIP  
AUDIO  
REC  
REC MODE TIME SLIP PROG/CHECK  
To pause recording  
Press [;].  
Press again to restart recording.  
You can also press [¥ REC] to restart.  
(Title is not split into separate titles.)  
REC MODE  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.  
To stop recording  
When recording a digital radio broadcast or a digital broadcast that  
is not being received correctly, the digital channel information  
(> 14) is also recorded and remains visible during playback.  
Press [].  
From the start to the end of the recording is called one title.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW] It takes about 30 seconds for the unit to  
complete recording management information after recording  
finishes.  
In order to play DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +R  
(recorded with this unit) on other DVD players, it is necessary  
to finalise them (> 58).  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit  
the connections to this unit.  
Turn on this unit.  
1 Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the  
In order to play +RW on other players, we recommend you to  
create a top menu. (> 58)  
HDD or DVD drive.  
The HDD or DVD indicator lights up on the unit’s display.  
2
If you selected the DVD drive  
To specify a time to stop recording—  
One Touch Recording  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
During recording  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main  
unit to open the tray and insert a disc.  
Press the button again to close the tray.  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit to select  
3 Press [W X CH] to select the channel.  
the recording time.  
Channels are displayed in the order of digital channels first,  
and then followed by analogue channels.  
Digital channel  
You can specify up to 4 hours later.  
The unit display changes as shown below.  
OFF 0:30 ""# OFF 1:00 ""# OFF 1:30 ""# OFF 2:00  
REC  
^" Counter (cancel)  
,"" OFF 4:00 ,"" OFF 3:00 ,}  
This does not work during timer recordings (> 17, 23) or while  
using Flexible Recording (> 21).  
The unit turns off automatically after the time to stop recording is  
reached.  
You can also select the channel with the numbered buttons.  
e.g., 5:  
15:  
115:  
[0] > [0] > [5]  
[0] > [1] > [5]  
[1] > [1] > [5]  
To cancel  
Analogue channel  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit several times until the counter  
appears.  
REC  
The time to stop recording is cancelled; however, recording  
continues.  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
You can also select the channel with the following steps.  
1
2
Press [ANALOGUE CH].  
Press the numbered buttons to select the channel.  
e.g., 5:  
15:  
[0] > [5]  
[1] > [5]  
RQT9306  
16  
Timer recording  
Refer to “Advanced timer recording” (> 23–27) for  
detail information.  
1 Press [GUIDE].  
Wed 13.10.09 12:53  
All Channels  
TV Guide:  
Landscape  
All Types  
Wed 13.10  
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...  
TV  
Time:  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
Emmerdale  
SELECT  
AV  
PAGE  
2 3  
4 5 6  
1
CH  
+24 hours  
OPTION: Free Word Search  
info  
Prog.Type  
Favourite  
Page  
SELECT  
RETURN  
Guide Change Display Mode  
Page  
ANALOGUE  
CH  
8 9  
7
G-Code  
DELETE  
INPUT  
0
SELECT  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
future programme and press [OK].  
If “Selection Screen” is displayed, press [3, 4] to select  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
STOP  
“Rec.” and press [OK].  
STATUS  
EXIT  
1:58 SP  
Timer  
Remain  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
WED 13.10.09. 12:53:00  
I
Recording  
GUIDE  
HDD  
Channel Date  
Start  
Stop  
Mode  
DVD  
HDD SP  
OK  
1
ARD 15. 10.TUE 16:00  
17:00  
,,,  
All Channels : ARD  
Programme Name  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Fliege-Die Talkshow  
OK  
CREATE  
CHAPTER  
Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV  
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using  
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> 23, right column, step 3).  
DISPLAY  
AUDIO  
MANUAL SKIP  
See also “Notes for recording” (> 19).  
Depending on the type of disc used for recording or the type of  
broadcast, there may be restrictions on the title you are trying to  
record.  
3 Press [OK].  
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is  
displayed.  
I.Y. SOS  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.  
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)  
19:30  
20:00  
20:30  
00  
st  
Timer icon  
D.I.Y. SOS  
  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.  
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording  
standby has been activated.  
Repeat steps 2–3 to programme other recordings.  
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to  
suit the connections to this unit.  
If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording  
(> 10, 13).  
Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 64).  
Note  
If “NTSC” has been selected for “TV System” (> 63), the TV Guide  
system cannot be used.  
If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the start  
recording time and finish recording time can be set to a margin of  
up to 10 minutes. (> 61, Start Recording Time, Finish Recording  
Time)  
Using the TV Guide system to make timer  
recordings (Digital broadcast only)  
TV Guide system provides programme information only from the  
digital broadcasts station displayed on the television like a TV  
programme magazine.  
To cancel a timer recording on the TV Guide  
screen  
This unit receives the programme information differently according  
to where you live.  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the programme in the TV Guide  
and press [OK].  
Note  
“Selection Screen” appears.  
TV Guide does not work if the clock is not set correctly.  
If the unit is disconnected from the AC mains, all programme data  
are not updated.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK]. (“F” in the TV  
Guide disappears.)  
Analogue broadcasts can be recorded manually or with the G-CODE  
system (> 23).  
Depending on the region etc., the TV Guide screen may be  
different to the actual screen.  
Note  
The receipt of the TV Guide system data is only possible via the  
aerial input of this unit. It is not possible to receive the data via the  
externally connected digital satellite receiver.  
To cancel recording when recording has already  
begun (> 24)  
To release the unit from recording standby  
(> 24)  
Notes on timer recording (> 25)  
RQT9306  
17  
Deleting titles  
Using the DELETE Navigator to delete  
TV  
1
While stopped  
VOL  
CH  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
AV  
DRIVE  
SELECT  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
PAGE  
2 3  
1
CH  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and  
4 5 6  
press [OK].  
ANALOGUE  
CH  
8 9  
0
7
G-Code  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video” and  
DELETE  
INPUT  
SELECT  
DELETE   
SKIP  
SLOW/SEARCH  
press [OK].  
,   
DELETE Navigator  
HDD  
Grouped Titles  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
MUSIC  
PAUSE  
PLAY/x1.3  
STOP  
STATUS  
EXIT  
10.10.  
11.10.  
2
EXIT  
I
OK  
FUNCTION MENU  
RETURN  
Previous  
Next  
Select Previous  
Page 02/02  
OK  
,,,  
Next  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OPTION  
RETURN  
OK  
CREATE  
DISPLAY  
CHAPTER  
AUDIO  
MANUAL SKIP  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title  
and press [;].  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
(You cannot delete items on finalised discs.)  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
A title cannot be restored once it is deleted. Make certain  
before proceeding.  
You cannot delete while recording or copying.  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Preparation  
You can confirm the titles, that you have selected using the  
option menu.  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Title View” (> 38,  
step 4).  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).  
Available disc space after deleting  
5 Press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM] The space deleted becomes available for recording.  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and  
press [OK].  
Available disc space increases after  
deleting any of these titles  
The title is deleted.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
Available  
disc space  
......  
Last title  
recorded  
Title  
Title  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
Deleting during play  
[-RW‹V›] [+RW] Available recording space increases only when the  
last recorded title is deleted.  
1
While playing  
Available disc space does  
not increase even after  
deleting  
Available disc space  
increases after deleting  
Press [DELETE ¢].  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and  
press [OK].  
Last title Available disc  
......  
Title  
Title  
Title  
recorded  
space  
The title is deleted.  
Later recorded  
titles  
Deleted  
Last title  
recorded  
Available  
disc space  
......  
This space become available for recording after all the later  
recorded titles are deleted.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] Available space does not increase even  
after the contents are deleted.  
RQT9306  
18  
anced  
ations  
Notes for recording  
Broadcast in multi-channel sound (Digital broadcast only):  
Selecting Audio for  
Recording  
Hello  
Hola  
Hallo  
You can select the audio language when receiving audio in  
multi channel broadcast [“Multi Audio” appears at the bottom of  
digital channel information display (> 14)].  
Select the audio that you want  
to record in “DVB Multi Audio”  
in the on-screen menu (> 55).  
However, audio cannot be switched after recording.  
Bilingual broadcasts (Analogue broadcast only):  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Select the main or secondary audio before  
Both main and secondary audio can be recorded.  
You can change the audio during playback.  
(> 28, Changing audio during play)  
recording  
(> 62, Bilingual Audio Selection)  
M 1  
However in the following cases, select whether to record the  
main or secondary audio:  
The selected  
audio only is  
recorded.  
Hello  
–Recording sound in LPCM (> 62, Audio  
Mode for XP Recording)  
M 1  
M 2  
Hello  
Hallo  
–“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”  
(The default setting is “On”. > 61)  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
If you record from external equipment  
Select “M 1” or “M 2” on the external  
equipment.  
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”)  
[-R] [-RW‹V›]  
[HDD] [RAM] (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is  
set to “Off”)  
The programme will be recorded in the original  
aspect.  
About the aspect  
when recording a  
programme  
If “Aspect for Recording” in the Setup menu is set to  
“Automatic” (The default setting is “Automatic” > 61), the  
programme will be recorded in the original aspect used when  
recording started (including when recording started at a  
commercial, etc.). If recorded with a different aspect, select the  
correct aspect (“16:9” or “4:3”).  
[+R] [+RW]  
The programme will be recorded in 4:3 aspect.  
However, in the following case, programme will be recorded in  
4:3.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] Programme recorded using “EP” or “FR  
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording modes will be  
recorded in 4:3 aspect.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD.  
When you want to  
copy titles in high  
speed mode from the  
HDD to DVD-R, etc.  
(The default setting is “On”. > 61)  
You can copy titles in high speed mode (max. speed is 75X§); however, the audio and aspect settings (> above)  
are necessary before recording to the HDD.  
§
Depending on the disc, max. speed may vary.  
Record to the HDD  
High speed copy to DVD-R, etc.  
HDD  
In the following cases, high speed mode does not work.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode  
It is not possible to record the broadcasts that allow “One time only recording” onto DVD-R, DVD-RW, +R, +RW or  
8 cm DVD-RAM discs. Use the HDD or CPRM (> 81) compatible DVD-RAM.  
When recording the  
“One time only  
recording”  
[RAM] CPRM compatible discs only.  
broadcasts  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
[HDD]  
  
(: Can do, –: Cannot do)  
“One time only recording” titles can only be transferred from the HDD to CPRM compatible DVD-RAM (They are  
deleted from the HDD). They cannot be copied.  
Even when copying to videotape the title may not be copied correctly because of the copy guard.  
You cannot copy a playlist created from “One time only recording” titles.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
The disc must be finalised after recording or copying (> 58).  
Playing the disc on  
other DVD players  
It is necessary to finalise DVD-R, etc. on this unit after recording or copying titles to them. You can then play them  
as a commercially sold DVD-Video. However, the discs become play-only and you can no longer record or copy.§  
§
You can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.  
Play on other DVD equipment  
Record to DVD-R, etc.  
/I  
  
D
O
U
B
L
E
R
E
-
M
A
S
T
E
R
C
D
S
E
Q
U
E
N
T
I
A
L
DISC  
1
2
3
4
5
  
  
  
/  
/  
D
I
S
C
E
X
C
H
A
N
G
E
D
I
S
C
S
K
I
P
O
P
E
N
/
C
L
O
S
E
SEARCH  
ENTER  
V
O
L
Y
DI  
S
PLA  
NU  
T
OP  
ME  
RETURN  
ON  
MENU  
OFF  
DC  
IN  
9V  
OPEN  
Finalise  
D
UN  
RO  
UR  
A.S  
E
A
T
REPE  
T
OR MOD  
MONI  
P
I
C
T
U
R
E
M
O
D
E
[+RW] If the disc failed to play on other equipment, we recommend you create top menu (> 58).  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
Recording to DVD-R DL  
and +R DL  
It is not possible to record to both the HDD and the DVD drive simultaneously.  
RQT9306  
19  
Advanced recording  
Recording modes and approximate recording times  
Depending on the content being recorded, the recording times may become shorter than indicated.  
(The times provided on this chart are an estimate.)  
DVD-R DL§3  
(8.5 GB)  
+R DL§3  
(8.5 GB)  
Recording Mode  
HDD  
(250 GB)  
DVD-RAM  
Single-sided  
(4.7 GB)  
DVD-R  
DVD-RW  
+R  
+RW  
(4.7 GB)  
Double-  
sided§1  
(9.4 GB)  
XP (High picture  
quality recording  
mode)  
55 hours  
1 hour  
2 hours  
1 hour  
1 hour 45 min.  
1 hour 45 min.  
SP (Standard  
recording mode)  
110 hours  
221 hours  
2 hours  
4 hours  
4 hours  
8 hours  
2 hours  
4 hours  
3 hours 35 min.  
7 hours 10 min.  
3 hours 35 min.  
7 hours 10 min.  
LP (Long recording  
mode)  
EP (Extra long  
441 hours  
8 hours  
16 hours  
8 hours  
14 hours 20 min.  
recording mode)§4  
(331hours§2  
)
(6 hours§2  
)
(12 hours§2  
)
(6 hours§2  
)
(10 hours 45 min.§2  
)
FR (Flexible  
441 hours  
maximum  
8 hours  
maximum  
8 hours  
maximum for  
one side  
8 hours  
maximum  
14 hours 20 min.  
Approximately  
9 hours with video  
quality equivalent to  
LP mode.  
Recording Mode)§4  
§1 It is not possible to record or play continuously from one side of a double sided disc to the other.  
§2 When “Recording time in EP mode” is set to “EP ( 6Hours )” in the Setup menu (> 61).  
The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6Hours )” than when using “EP ( 8Hours )”.  
§3 You cannot record directly to DVD-R DL and +R DL discs with this unit. The table shows the recording time when copying.  
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
§4 When recording to the HDD in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode, you cannot perform high-speed copy to +R, +R DL or +RW  
discs.  
[RAM] When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8Hours )” mode, play may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with DVD-RAM.  
Use “EP ( 6Hours )” mode if playback may be on other equipment.  
[HDD]  
You can record up to 499 titles on HDD. (When continuously recording for long durations, titles are automatically divided every 8 hours.)  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›]  
You can record up to 99 titles on one disc.  
[+R] [+RW]  
You can record up to 49 titles on one disc.  
FR (Flexible Recording Mode)  
You can set FR (Flexible Recording) mode when copying or programming timer recordings.  
The unit automatically selects a recording rate between XP and EP ( 8Hours ) that will enable the recordings to fit in the remaining disc space with  
the best possible recording quality.  
For example with a 90-minute recording to an unused DVD-RAM, the picture quality is adjusted to between “XP” and “SP”.  
When recording to the HDD, picture quality is automatically adjusted to precisely fit a copied title on a 4.7 GB disc.  
All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in the display.  
REC  
When removing a recorded disc  
When the format confirmation screen is  
displayed  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
The following screen appears when you have not processed the disc  
for play on other equipment.  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
When you insert a new disc or a disc recorded on a computer or  
other equipment, a format confirmation screen is displayed. Format  
the disc to use it. However, all the recorded contents are deleted.  
Finalise  
Finalise the disc so that it can be played  
on other DVD players.  
Format  
Note: Recording or Editing is not possible  
after finalising.This may take up to min.  
This disc is not formatted properly.  
Do you want to format the disc now ?  
Press the REC button to start finalise.  
Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to exit.  
This disc cannot be played on other  
DVD players without finalising.  
Yes  
No  
SELECT  
To finalise the disc  
RETURN  
OK  
Press [¥ REC] on the main unit.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
You cannot stop this process once you have started it.  
If you want to set the background, play menu select or provide a  
disc name, select “Top Menu” (> 58), “Auto-Play Select” (> 58) or  
“Disc Name” (> 56) in “DVD Management” before finalising.  
To format a disc  
“Deleting all the contents—Format” (> 57)  
To open the tray without disc finalisation  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit.  
RQT9306  
20  
5
When you want to start recording  
Flexible Recording  
(Recording that fits the remaining disc space)  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Start”  
and press [OK].  
All the recording modes from XP to EP appear in  
the display.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
.
The unit sets the best possible picture quality that fits the recording  
within the remaining disc space. The recording mode becomes FR  
mode.  
XP  
SP  
LP  
EP  
Using “Flexible Rec” is convenient in these  
kinds of situations.  
e.g., HDD  
[RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
To exit the screen without recording  
Press [RETURN ].  
When the amount of free space on the disc makes selecting an  
appropriate recording mode difficult  
When you want to record a long programme with the best picture  
quality possible  
HDD  
Remaining  
time of  
recording  
To stop recording partway  
Press [].  
REC 0:59  
1 DVB  
ABC1  
L R  
To show the remaining time  
Press [STATUS ].  
[HDD]  
When you want to record a title to HDD so that it can then be  
copied to fit one 4.7 GB disc perfectly  
You do not need to edit the recorded title, or change the recording  
mode when copying, to fit the disc space.  
Playing while you are recording  
[HDD] [RAM]  
e.g., Recording a 90-minute programme to disc  
If you select XP mode, the programme will not fit one disc.  
Playing from the beginning of the title you are  
recording—Chasing playback  
If you try to record a 90-minute  
programme in XP mode, only the first  
60 minutes will fit on the disc and the  
30-minute balance will not get  
Press [1] (PLAY) during recording.  
There is no sound output while searching forward or backward.  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
recorded.  
Another disc is necessary.  
To stop play  
Press [].  
If you select SP mode, the programme will fit one disc.  
To stop recording  
2 seconds after play stops, press [].  
However there will be 30 minutes  
remaining disc space.  
To stop timer recording  
2 seconds after play stops  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
1
2
Press [].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].  
If you select “Flexible Rec” the programme will fit one disc  
perfectly.  
Playing a title previously recorded while recording—  
Simultaneous rec and play  
You can also change the drive and play while recording. Press  
[DRIVE SELECT].  
4.7GB  
DVD-RAM  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] during  
recording.  
Necessary space for recording  
Preparation  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title  
Select the channel or the external input to record.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
and press [OK].  
There is no sound output while searching forward or  
backward.  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
To stop play  
Press [].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and  
To exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
press [OK].  
To stop recording/To stop timer recording  
After play stops  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Flexible Rec”  
and press [OK].  
1
2
3
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR] to exit screen.  
Press [].  
If the recording stop confirmation screen is displayed, press  
[2, 1] to select “Stop Recording” and press [OK].  
Flexible Rec  
Maximum recording time  
Record in FR mode.  
This is the maximum recording  
time in EP ( 8Hours ) mode.  
Maximum rec. time 8 Hour 00 Min.  
Set rec. time  
8 Hour 00 Min.  
Start  
Cancel  
Note  
“Chasing playback” and “Simultaneous rec and play” can only be  
used with programmes of the same encoding system (PAL/NTSC).  
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and  
“Min.” and press [3, 4] to set the  
recording time.  
You can also set the recording time with the numbered  
buttons.  
You cannot record more than 8 hours.  
RQT9306  
21  
Copying from a video cassette recorder  
e.g., Connecting to the AV3 or DV input terminals on the front  
You can also connect to the AV4 input terminals on the rear.  
DV automatic recording (DV Auto Rec)  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
Turn off the unit and other video equipment before connecting.  
[HDD] [RAM] When the “DV Auto Rec” function is used, programmes  
are recorded as a title while at the same time chapters are created at  
each break in the images and the playlist is created automatically.  
REC  
Preparation  
This unit  
1
Turn off the main unit and DV equipment, then connect the  
equipment with the unit’s DV input terminal (> left).  
Turn on the main unit.  
VIDEO L/MONO - AUDIO- R  
S VIDEO  
DV IN  
AV3 IN  
2
When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,  
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 63).  
1 Turn on the DV equipment, and pause  
play at the point you want recording to  
DV cable  
(IEEE 1394,  
4-pin)  
S Video  
cable§1  
Audio/Video  
cable§2  
start.  
Other video equipment  
The following screen appears.  
DV Auto Rec  
DV unit is connected.  
Record from the DV unit ?  
Connect to Audio/Video output terminals.  
If the audio output of the other equipment is monaural  
Rec to HDD  
Rec to DVD  
Cancel  
Connect to L/MONO on the AV3 input terminals at the front.  
§1  
The S VIDEO terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the  
SELECT  
VIDEO terminal.  
Connect to terminals of the same colour.  
RETURN  
OK  
§2  
When the screen is not displayed  
After performing step 1  
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal  
Select the type of audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input”  
in the Setup menu (> 62).  
When recording from DV equipment (e.g., digital video  
camcorder), you can record audio/video recordings from DV tape  
only.  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 61) is set to “On” and you  
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected  
in “Aspect for Recording” (> 61) of the Setup menu.  
1
2
3
4
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select “DV Auto Rec” and press [OK].  
> Go to step 3 (> below)  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec to HDD”  
About the aspect when recording a programme (> 19)  
or “Rec to DVD” and press [OK].  
Note  
If it becomes time for a timer recording to start while copying, the  
recording will start and the copying will stop.  
If video is copied from another piece of equipment to this unit, then  
the video quality will be degraded.  
3 Press [REC MODE] to select the  
recording mode.  
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Rec.” and  
Manual recording  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
press [OK].  
Recording starts.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
Press [REC MODE] to select the recording mode.  
When recording bilingual programmes (> 19, Notes for recording)  
When the output signal from the external equipment is NTSC,  
change the “TV System” to “NTSC” in the Setup menu (> 63).  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have  
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can  
be recorded onto the HDD.)  
When recording finishes  
The confirmation screen appears. Press [OK] to finish DV automatic  
recording.  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
Note  
Only one piece of DV equipment (e.g., digital video camcorder)  
can be connected to the unit via the DV input terminal.  
To reduce noise in input from a video cassette recorder, set “Input  
NR” to “On” in the on-screen menu (> 54).  
Check the time on the unit is correct.  
It is not possible to operate the unit from the connected DV equipment.  
The DV input on this unit is for use with DV equipment only. (It  
cannot be connected to a computer, etc.)  
1
While stopped  
The DV equipment name may not be shown correctly.  
Depending on the DV equipment, the images or audio may not be  
input properly.  
The date and time information on the tape of the DV equipment will  
not be recorded.  
Press [INPUT SELECT] to select the  
input channel for the equipment you  
have connected.  
You cannot record and play simultaneously.  
e.g., If you have connected to AV3 input terminals, select  
AV3”.  
If the DV automatic recording function does not work properly,  
check the connections and DV equipment settings, and turn the  
unit off and back on.  
If that does not work, follow the instructions for manual  
recording (> left).  
2 Start play on the other equipment.  
3
When you want to start recording  
Press [¥ REC].  
Recording starts.  
To skip unwanted parts  
Press [;] to pause recording. (Press again to restart recording.)  
To stop recording  
Press [].  
Almost all videos and DVD-Video on sale have been treated to  
prevent illegal copying. Any software that has been so treated  
cannot be recorded using this unit.  
Using Flexible Recording (> 21), you can record the content of a  
video cassette (approx. 1–8 hours) to a 4.7 GB disc with the best  
possible quality of recording without wasting disc space.  
RQT9306  
22  
Advanced timer recording  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
You can enter up to 32 programmes up to a month in advance.  
Manually programming timer  
recordings  
(Each daily or weekly programme is counted as one programme.)  
[RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+RW]  
To use a new disc, formatting is necessary.  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
Preparation  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate video input to  
suit the connections to this unit.  
If recording to DVD, insert a disc that you can use for recording  
(> 10, 13).  
Make sure that the clock settings are correct (> 64).  
1:58 SP  
Timer  
Remain  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
TUE 14.10.09. 12:54:00  
Recording  
HDD  
Drive  
No. Channel Date  
Start  
Stop DVD Mode  
space  
New Timer Programme  
Using G-CODE system to make timer  
recordings (Analogue broadcast only)  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New Timer  
Programme” and press [OK].  
G-code is a registered trademark of  
Gemstar Development Corporation. The  
G-CODE system is manufactured under  
license from Gemstar Development  
Corporation.  
3 Press [1] to move through the items  
and change the items with [3, 4].  
1:58 SP  
Timer  
Remain  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
TUE 14.10.09. 12:54:00  
Recording  
Entering G-CODE numbers is an easy way of timer recording. You  
can find these numbers in TV listings in newspapers or magazines.  
HDD  
Channel Date  
Start  
Stop  
Mode  
DVD  
HDD SP  
1
ARD 15. 7.TUE  
22:00  
22:30  
All Channels : ARD  
Note  
Programme Name  
The G-CODE system is not supported for digital broadcasts.  
When “Channel” is selected, you can press the “Blue” button  
to change the category [e.g., Free TV, Radio, Favourite  
(> 59)] and then press [3, 4] to select the channel you  
want to record.  
Press and hold [3, 4] to alter the Start (Start time) and Stop  
(Finish time) in 30-minute increments.  
1 Press [G-Code].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
G-Code  
Record  
Remain  
TUE 14.10.09. 12:53:00  
You can also set Channel (Programme position/TV Station  
Name), Date, Start (Start time), and Stop (Finish time) with  
the numbered buttons.  
Input G-Code Number 0-9, and press OK.  
Date  
[. Date:  
;:  
Daily timer:  
;:  
Current date up to one month later minus  
one day  
2 Press the numbered buttons to enter  
l
l
l
l
SUN-SAT>MON-SAT>MON-FRI  
the G-CODE number.  
Press [2] to move back to correct a digit.  
a. Weekly timer: SUN>--->SAT  
3 Press [OK].  
Titles recorded using the same daily or weekly timer are  
bundled and displayed as a “group” in the  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen (> 29) except when using  
Auto Renewal Recording.  
1:58 SP  
Timer  
Remain  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
TUE 14.10.09. 12:53:00  
Recording  
HDD  
Channel Date  
Start  
Stop  
Mode  
You can also press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the recording  
drive.  
DVD  
HDD  
1
ARD 15. 7.TUE  
16:00  
17:00  
SP  
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough  
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the  
“HDD” (> 24, Relief Recording).  
You can also press [REC MODE] to change the recording  
mode.  
All Channels : ARD  
Programme Name  
Confirm the programme (start and end time) by using a TV  
magazine, etc. and make corrections if necessary using  
[3, 4, 2, 1] (> right column, step 3).  
[HDD] RENEW (Auto Renewal Recording) (> 24)  
ON!)OFF  
When “-- ---” appears in the “Channel” column, you cannot  
set timer recording. Press [3, 4] to select desired  
programme position. After you have entered the information  
of a TV station, it is kept in the unit’s memory.  
Programme Name  
Press [2, 1] to select “Programme Name” and press [OK].  
(> 44, Entering text)  
4 Press [OK].  
4 Press [OK].  
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is  
displayed.  
The timer programme is stored and the timer icon is  
displayed.  
No. Channel  
01  
No. Channel  
01  
Timer icon  
  
ARD  
Timer icon  
  
ARD  
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording  
F” lights on the unit’s display to indicate timer recording  
standby has been activated.  
standby has been activated.  
TUE 14.10.09. 12:56:00  
TUE 14.10.09. 12:56:00  
HDD  
Drive  
HDD  
Drive  
Stop  
17:00  
Mode  
space  
DVD  
Check to make sure “OK” is  
displayed (> 25).  
Stop  
22:30  
Mode  
space  
DVD  
HDD  
SP  
OK  
Check to make sure “OK” is  
displayed (> 25).  
HDD  
SP  
OK  
rogramme  
ogramme  
Repeat steps 1–4 to programme other recordings.  
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.  
Repeat steps 2–4 to programme other recordings.  
Press [Í] to turn the unit off.  
RQT9306  
23  
Advanced timer recording  
To cancel recording when recording  
has already begun  
Relief Recording  
When the recording drive is “DVD” and there is not enough  
remaining space, recording automatically switches to the “HDD”. If  
there is no disc in the tray or the disc cannot be recorded on or when  
timer recording starts while copying, the recording drive will be  
altered to the HDD.  
1
While the unit is on  
Press [].  
Stop Recording  
The DIRECT NAVIGATOR shows which programmes were relief-  
recorded (“ ” is displayed.) (> 29).  
If the time remaining on the HDD is insufficient, as much of the  
programme as possible will be recorded onto the HDD.  
Timer recording in progress.  
Stop this timer recording ?  
It will be cancelled if you stop.  
Cancel  
Stop Recording  
SELECT  
Auto Renewal Recording  
RETURN  
OK  
[HDD]  
If you record a programme onto HDD repeatedly everyday or every  
week using timer recording, the unit will record the new programme  
over the old one.  
This function can be used only when daily or weekly timer  
recording is selected.  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Stop  
Recording” and press [OK].  
If you stop a timer recording, it will be cancelled. However, if  
you have set a daily or weekly timer recording, the recording  
will start from the next time the timer recording is set.  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
To release the unit from recording  
standby  
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer recording  
list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme  
and press [OK].  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “RENEW”  
column.  
1 Press [PROG/CHECK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “ON” and press  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the programme  
[OK].  
and press the “Red” button.  
1:58 SP  
TUE 14.10.09. 12:53:00  
Timer  
Remain  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Recording  
The timer icon “F” (> 25) disappears from the timer  
recording list.  
HDD  
DVD  
RENEW  
ON  
Channel Date  
ARD  
SUN  
Start  
Stop  
Mode  
You cannot cancel timer recording standby mode as long as  
even one timer icon “F” (> 25) remains in the timer  
recording list.  
1
22:00  
22:30  
HDD  
SP  
All Channels : ARD  
Programme Name  
Press the “Red” button again to activate timer recording  
standby.  
Note  
If a programme set for Auto Renewal Recording is protected or  
while play back is taking place from the HDD, or while copying, the  
programme will not be overwritten. Instead the programme set for  
recording will be saved as a separate programme, and this  
programme will be the one to be overwritten when the next Auto  
Renewal Recording takes place.  
Playlists made from programmes that were set for Auto Renewal  
Recording are deleted along with auto renewal.  
When there is not enough space on the HDD, the programme may  
not be recorded completely.  
RQT9306  
24  
Notes on timer recording  
Check, change or delete a programme  
A disc with different TV system may not be played with the setting  
as is, only when recording or on standby for the timer recording.  
In this case, you will be able to playback by changing the “TV  
System” settings. But to prevent the failure of the timer recording,  
change back the settings before the recording starts. (> 63)  
Timer recordings are activated regardless of whether the unit is  
turned on/off.  
Even when the unit is turned off, you can display the timer  
recording list by pressing [PROG/CHECK].  
Press [PROG/CHECK].  
1:58 SP  
HDD 30:24 SP DVD  
Timer  
Remain  
Recording  
TUE 14.10.09. 12:54:00  
Timer recordings begin when the set time is reached even when  
playing.  
Timer recordings do not begin while editing or copying in normal  
speed mode (> 45).  
HDD  
Drive  
No. Channel Date  
Start  
Stop DVD  
Mode  
space  
New Timer Programme  
If the unit is turned on when timer recording begins, it remains  
turned on after recording finishes. It does not turn off automatically.  
You can turn the unit off during timer recording.  
When you programme successive timer recordings to start  
immediately one after the other, the unit cannot record the part at  
the beginning of the later programmes.  
Press OK to store new programme.  
OK  
RETURN  
Programme  
A Icons  
Programme  
Not recorded  
F
[
Timer recording standby is activated.  
This programme is currently recording.  
Programmes are overlapped. Recording of the programme  
with the later start time starts when the earlier programme  
finishes recording.  
Recorded  
Recorded  
You stopped a daily or weekly timer recording. The icon  
disappears the next time the timer programme starts  
recording.  
The disc was full so the programme failed to record.  
The programme was copy-protected so it was not recorded.  
X
The programme did not complete recording because the disc  
is dirty or some other reason.  
Timer programmes set to Auto Renewal Recording (> 24).  
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD  
(Displayed while recording.)  
HDD Recording drive is set to HDD  
DVD Recording drive is set to DVD  
B Message displayed in the “Drive space” line  
OK: Displayed if the recording can fit in the remaining  
space.  
> (Date): For recordings made daily or weekly, the display will  
show until when recordings can be made (up to a  
maximum of one month from the present time) based  
on the time remaining on the disc.  
! : It may not be possible to record because:  
there is not enough space left.  
the number of possible titles has reached its  
maximum.  
programmes are overlapped.  
you stopped a daily or weekly timer recording.  
Relief: Timer programmes that will be relief recorded to the  
HDD.  
C Channel name, programme name and other  
information are displayed.  
To change a programme  
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OK]. (> 23,  
right column, step 3)  
To delete a programme  
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [DELETE ¢].  
You can also delete a programme with the following steps  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select the programme and press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
To exit the timer recording list  
Press [PROG/CHECK].  
Note  
Programmes that failed to record are deleted from the timer  
recording list at 4 a.m. two days later.  
RQT9306  
25  
Advanced timer recording  
When the TV Guide displays “No information  
available for analogue channels” or the empty  
TV Guide list  
Operations in the TV Guide system  
Press [GUIDE] to switch between Landscape view and Portrait  
view.  
Wed 13.10.09 12:53  
All Channels  
TV Guide:  
Wed 13.10  
Landscape  
Landscape view  
All Types  
Wed 13.10.09 12:53  
All Channels  
TV Guide:  
Wed 13.10  
Landscape  
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...  
All Types  
Time:  
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...  
The “empty” field  
Time:  
Emmerdale  
Some digital broadcast may not send programme information.  
Set the timer recording manually or with the G-CODE system  
(> 23).  
Emmerdale  
+24 hours  
OPTION: Free Word Search  
info  
Prog.Type  
Favourite  
Page  
Selecting the programme from the  
desired programme type or category  
SELECT  
RETURN  
Guide Change Display Mode  
Page  
This function lets you display a TV Guide list sorted by programme  
type (e.g. Movies, Sport) or category (e.g. Free TV, Radio).  
Portrait view  
Wed 13.10.09 12:53  
All Channels  
TV Guide: Portrait  
1
From the desired programme type  
All Types  
Wed 13.10  
13 Channel 4+1  
13 Channel 4  
Press the “Yellow” button to display  
14 More 4  
16 E4  
15 ITV 4  
:
:
19 30 20 00  
Hollyoaks  
the list of programme type.  
:
:
20 00 20 55  
Channel 4 News  
3 Minute Wonder  
How to Look Good Naked  
The Secret Millionaire  
Love Trap  
From the desired category  
:
:
20 55 21 00  
:
:
21 00 22 00  
Press the “Blue” button to display the  
list of categories.  
:
22 00 23:00  
23:0  
0
00:05  
+24 hours  
Prog.Type  
Favourite  
Page  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the desired  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OPTION: Free Word Search  
info  
Guide Change Display Mode  
Page  
item.  
All Types  
All Channels  
To change channels  
Landscape view  
Press [3, 4] to select a channel.  
All Types  
Movie  
News  
All Channels  
Free TV  
Radio  
Entertainment  
Portrait view  
Favourite 1  
Press [2, 1] to select a channel.  
3 Press [OK].  
The TV Guide list appears for this channel.  
A list appears with all programmes of the selected item.  
To view a programme list for another day  
Jump ahead 24 hours  
Press the “Green” button to jump ahead by one day.  
Jump back 24 hours  
When you select the Landscape view, the unit displays  
programmes in grey that do not belong to the selected  
programme type.  
Press the “Red” button.  
You can only jump back to the current date. Past information  
cannot be viewed.  
Wed 13.10.09 12:53  
All Channels  
TV Guide:  
Wed 13.10  
Landscape  
e.g.,  
News  
Programme  
type, “News” is  
selected in  
step 2 of  
Emmerdale : In today’s show we will...  
Time:  
To browse through the TV Guide list  
Press [W X CH].  
Emmerdale  
Landscape view.  
To see programme information  
(Programmes with the  
symbol)  
Press [STATUS ].  
Additional information (programme name, programme duration,  
broadcast time, description) is available for these programmes.  
+24 hours  
OPTION: Free Word Search  
info  
Prog.Type  
Favourite  
Page  
SELECT  
RETURN  
Guide Change Display Mode  
Page  
TV Guide  
Tue 14.10.09 19:45  
Wed 15.10.  
Note  
Spending Other People’s Money  
ABC ONE, Lifestyle  
The broadcasters allocate individual programmes to topic areas.  
This function does not work properly unless the information which  
distinguishes the programme type and categories sent from  
broadcast stations is correct.  
19:30-20:00. 30min.  
A
flashy car salesman loses his cool when stingy friend  
takes over his wallet. He’s lorced to sell his possessions  
at car boot sale to pay for food.  
a
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
TIMER REC  
RETURN  
programme and press [OK].  
Return to List  
When “Timer Recording” screen appears. (> 17, Timer  
recording, step 3)  
Press [3, 4] to scroll up and down.  
To show other pages  
Press [CH W] (Previous) or [X CH] (Next).  
When “Selection Screen” screen appears.  
– “View” > 14, Watching analogue and digital broadcasts  
– “Rec.” > 17, Timer recording  
Press [STATUS ] again to return to the programme list.  
– “Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.  
Press [2, 1] to select ”Yes” and press [OK].  
The timer icon disappears.  
To return to the previous TV Guide list before you have selected  
the programme type or categories  
Select “All Types” of the programme type and “All Channels” of the  
categories in step 2 above.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT9306  
26  
Searching using programme information of titles  
recorded to the HDD  
Searching for the programme in the TV  
Guide  
You can search programmes from the TV Guide based on title  
information.  
[HDD]  
You can search for programmes using programme information of  
titles recorded to the HDD.  
Searching by entering words  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.  
By entering words, you can search for programmes from the TV  
Guide using the programme information.  
1
During play or while stopped  
1 Press [OPTION].  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red” button to  
select “VIDEO”.  
2 Enter the word you would like to  
search for and set.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles  
HDD  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
MUSIC  
Entry method > 44, Entering text  
Free Word Search  
10.10.  
11.10.  
2
Chantal Show  
Dolphines  
Simplified Search  
Detailed Search  
Detailed Search may result in  
many hits, but  
search time will be longer.  
Previous  
Next  
Select Previous  
Page 02/02  
OK  
RETURN  
Next  
OPTION  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Simplified  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.  
Search” or “Detailed Search” and  
press [OK].  
3 Press [OPTION].  
Simplified Search:  
It searches the programme names only.  
Detailed Search:  
It searches all the information on the programmes. It might  
take more time to search the desired programme.  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Find Titles”  
and press [OK].  
Edit  
Find Titles  
Create Group  
Wed 13.10.09 12:53  
TV Guide:  
Portrait  
Search results for “ROSEN”  
Wed 13.10  
1 ARD  
1 ARD  
2 ZDF  
3 RTL  
4 SAT1  
5 Press [] (Set).  
Wed 27.  
12:00 - 12:30 Rote Rosen  
15:00 - 15:15 Rote Rosen  
17:00 - 18:00 Rote Rosen  
15:00 - 15:15 Rote Rosen  
When searching using a word other than the title name,  
Fri 29.  
enter a different word. (> 44, Entering text)  
Search results appear.  
6 Press [3, 4] to select “Simplified  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
Search” or “Detailed Search” and  
press [OK].  
programme and press [OK].  
When “Timer Recording” screen appears. (> 17, Timer  
recording, step 3)  
Refer to “Searching for the programme in the TV Guide”  
(> left) for more information about “Simplified Search” and  
“Detailed Search”.  
When “Selection Screen” screen appears.  
View” > 14, Watching analogue and digital broadcasts  
Rec.” > 17, Timer recording  
7 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.  
programme and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select ”Yes” and press [OK].  
The timer icon disappears.  
When “Timer Recording” screen appears. (> 17, Timer  
recording, step 3)  
When “Selection Screen” screen appears.  
View” > 14, Watching analogue and digital broadcasts  
Rec.” > 17, Timer recording  
To return to the previous screen§  
Press [RETURN ].  
§
It may return to the TV Guide screen.  
Delete” > Timer recordings can be cancelled.  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
Press [2, 1] to select ”Yes” and press [OK].  
The timer icon disappears.  
To return to the previous screen  
If you press [RETURN ], the unit may return to the  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT9306  
27  
Advanced playback  
1 Press [TIME SLIP].  
Skipping  
the  
Operation during play  
Depending on the media, some operations may not be possible.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the time  
and press [OK].  
specified  
time (Time  
Play skips the specified time.  
Each time you press [3, 4], the time  
increases [3] or decreases [4] by  
1-minute intervals. (Press and hold for  
10-minute intervals.)  
Press [].  
The stopped position is memorized.  
Stop  
Slip)  
Resume play function  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-R] [-R]DL]  
[-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL]  
(This function  
does not work  
with finalised  
discs.)  
This automatically disappears after  
approximately 5 seconds. To show the screen  
again press [TIME SLIP] again.  
Stopped position  
If [] is pressed several times, the position is  
cleared in some cases.  
The position is cleared if the tray is opened.  
[CD] [VCD] and MP3/WMA/DivX : The position  
is cleared if the unit is turned off.  
-
5 min  
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Press [;].  
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Pause  
Press [6] or [5].  
Search  
The speed increases up to 5 steps. ([+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] up to 3 steps)  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Audio is heard during first level search  
forward.  
Press [MANUAL SKIP].  
Each time you press, play restarts  
approximately 1 minute later.  
Manual  
Skip  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-R] [-R]DL]  
[-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL]  
(This function  
does not work  
with finalised  
discs.)  
[CD] and MP3/WMA : Audio is heard during all  
levels of search.  
DivX : Audio is not heard during all levels of  
search.  
During play or while paused, press  
Skip  
[:] or [9].  
Skip to the title, chapter or track you want to  
play.  
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Press [CREATE CHAPTER].  
Chapters are divided at the point pressed.  
Press [:, 9] to skip to the start of a  
chapter.  
Create  
Each press increases the number of skips.  
DivX : Press [:] to return to the beginning  
of the title currently playing.  
Chapter  
(> 38, Chapter)  
Press the numbered buttons.  
Play starts from the selected title, chapter or  
track.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Starting  
from a  
Changing audio during play  
Press [AUDIO].  
selected  
[HDD]  
e.g.,  
5: [0] > [0] > [5]  
15: [0] > [1] > [5]  
title  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD], DivX and analogue broadcast  
MP3/WMA and JPEG  
e.g.,  
5: [0] > [0] > [0] > [5]  
15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]  
LR>L>R  
^---------------}  
HDD  
PLAY  
Other discs  
Input a 2-digit number  
e.g.,  
5: [0] > [5]  
15: [1] > [5]  
L R  
e.g., “L R” is selected  
This works only when  
stopped (the screen on the  
[DVD-V]  
You can change the audio channel number each time you press the  
button. This allows you to change things like the soundtrack  
language (> 54, Soundtrack).  
right is displayed on the television) with some  
discs.  
[VCD] (with playback control)  
If you press the numbered buttons while  
stopped (the above screen is displayed on the  
television) you can cancel PBC. (Elapsed play  
time appears on the unit’s display.)  
1 ENG  
Digital 3/2.1ch  
Soundtrack  
e.g., English is selected.  
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).  
Quick  
Note  
Play speed is quicker than normal.  
View  
You cannot change the audio type in the following cases.  
When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R  
DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is selected.  
When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP  
Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 62).  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On” (The default setting  
is “On” > 61).  
Press again to return to normal speed.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
While paused, press [6] or [5].  
Slow-  
The speed increases up to 5 steps.  
motion  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
[VCD] Forward direction [5] only.  
The unit will pause if slow-motion play is  
continued for approximately 5 minutes  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]  
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW]  
(excluding [DVD-V] [VCD]).  
[DVD-V]  
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
While paused, press [2] (2;) or  
Frame-by-  
[1] (;1).  
frame  
Each press shows the next frame.  
Press and hold to change in succession  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]  
[-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
forward or backward.  
[+R]  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
[+R]DL] [+RW]  
[VCD] Forward direction [1] (;1) only.  
[DVD-V]  
[-RW‹VR›] [VCD]  
RQT9306  
28  
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
You can quickly find the recorded titles and easily play them. You  
can also sort the titles or edit the Groups of titles.  
All Titles screen  
Displays all titles.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
All Titles  
VIDEO  
009  
PICTURE  
MUSIC  
HDD  
007  
008  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
ARD 18.10. SAT  
- - -  
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”  
button to select “VIDEO”.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title  
Previous  
Next  
Page 02/02  
OK  
Select Previous  
Next  
OPTION  
RETURN  
and press [OK].  
(in Thumbnail Display)  
You can also select titles with the numbered buttons (All Titles  
screen only).  
e.g., [HDD]  
To sort the titles for easy searching  
[HDD] (All Titles screen in Table Display only)  
5:  
115: [1] > [1] > [5]  
e.g., [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
5: [0] > [5] 15: [1] > [5]  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].  
(Thumbnail Display only)  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
[0] > [0] > [5]  
15:  
[0] > [1] > [5]  
This function is convenient when searching for one title to playback  
from many titles.  
1 Press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
If you select an item other than “No.”  
The DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen will reappear after playback  
of the selected title has finished. (You cannot play titles  
continuously.)  
To exit the screen  
Skip and Time Slip will only function with the title currently being  
played back.  
If you exit the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, or switch to  
another DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen, the sort will be  
cancelled.  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons  
[
Currently recording.  
Title protected.  
Title that was not recorded due to recording  
protection (Digital broadcasts etc.)  
To play grouped titles [HDD]  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OK].  
t
Title cannot be played  
[When copying a title to the HDD, or when data is  
damaged etc.]  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title and press [OK].  
Titles that have been rerouted to the HDD  
(> 24, Relief Recording)  
To edit the group of titles [HDD]  
[HDD] (Grouped Titles screen only)  
Title with “One time only recording” restriction (> 81,  
CPRM)  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a title or a group and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary titles.  
Groups of titles ([HDD] only)  
Title that was recorded but has not yet been played  
([HDD] only)  
Press [;] to cancel.  
2 Press [OPTION].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the option and press  
Create Group  
Title recorded using a different encoding system from  
that of the TV system currently selected on the unit.  
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit  
(> 63).  
(NTSC)  
(PAL)  
Release Grouping  
[OK].  
Create Group:  
Press [2, 1] to select “Create” and press [OK].  
Selected titles are bundled to form a group.  
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
appearance  
“Grouped Titles”/“All Titles” [HDD]  
“Table Display”/“Thumbnail Display”  
Release Grouping:  
Press [2, 1] to select “Release” and press [OK].  
When a group of titles has been selected, all the titles in the group  
are released.  
When a title in a group has been selected, the title is released from  
the group.  
1 While the DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen is displayed  
Press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
Regarding the group name  
The name of the first title in the group is used as the group name.  
e.g.,  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles  
HDD  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles  
HDD  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
MUSIC  
VIDEO  
Table Display  
Table Display” or “Thumbnail Display”  
All Titles  
“Grouped Titles” or “All Titles” [HDD]  
10.10.  
Chantal Show  
11.10.  
Dolphins  
2
ARD 11.10. SAT  
Dolphins  
ARD 18.10. SAT  
Dolphins 2  
PICTURE/MUSIC  
Grouped Titles screen  
Two or more titles recorded in the Daily/weekly timer recording mode  
are bundled and displayed as one item.  
Previous  
Next  
Select Previous  
Previous  
Next  
Page 02/02  
Page 01/01  
OK  
OK  
Select  
Next  
OPTION  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RETURN  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles  
HDD  
To change the group name  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
MUSIC  
1
2
3
4
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the group and press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Edit” and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Enter Title Name” and press [OK].  
10.10.  
Chantal Show  
11.10.  
Dolphines  
2
Enter the name. (> 44, Entering text)  
Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will  
not be changed.  
Previous  
Next  
Select Previous  
Page 02/02  
OK  
RETURN  
Next  
OPTION  
Note  
(in Thumbnail Display)  
This function is only available for Videos and not available for music  
or still pictures.  
Select the item marked with  
bundled titles.  
and press [OK] to display the  
RQT9306  
29  
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)  
Playing DivX video contents  
Showing the menu screen  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:  
1 Insert the disc.  
DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, Inc. This is an official  
DivX Certified device that plays DivX video.  
You can play DivX video contents recorded with a computer onto  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.  
2 If the disc contains different file types  
e.g., [CD]  
Disc  
Play Video ( DivX )  
Play Pictures ( JPEG )  
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )  
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )  
1 Show DivX Menu screen.  
(> left, Showing the menu screen)  
DivX Menu  
CD (DivX)  
Folder1 : 0025  
No.  
001  
Title Name  
Tree  
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
ABC.avi  
002  
003  
004  
DEF.avi  
GHI.avi  
JKL.avi  
Otherwise,  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
[USB]  
Page 001/001  
Total Title : 004  
1 Insert the USB memory.  
OK  
RETURN  
Files are treated as titles.  
USB device  
Play Video ( DivX )  
Play Pictures ( JPEG )  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the title and  
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )  
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )  
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )  
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )  
Update CD database on HDD  
press [OK].  
Play starts on the selected title.  
You can also select the title with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] > [0] > [5]  
15:  
[0] > [1] > [5]  
You can also display this screen with the following steps.  
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select”, and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “USB”, and press [OK].  
To stop playing  
Press [].  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Changing the file type to play  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
Note  
1 Press [RETURN ] several times to exit the  
menu.  
2 Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Picture sizes set at the recording time may prevent the unit from  
showing pictures in the adequate aspect. You may be able to  
adjust the aspect through the TV.  
Successive play is not possible.  
Playback is not possible if recording is performed on the HDD drive  
or the DVD drive.  
FUNCTION MENU  
CD(DivX)  
Playback  
Divx  
Recording  
Picture  
Music  
Using the tree screen to find a folder  
Copy  
TV Guide  
Others  
1 While the file list is displayed  
Drive Select  
OK  
Press [1] while a title is highlighted to display  
the tree screen.  
RETURN  
F: Selected folder no./Total folder no. including DivX title.  
3
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD]  
Folder  
DivX Menu  
CD (DivX)  
F
1/21  
1Press [3, 4] to select “Playback” and press  
12.02.2009  
Image001  
Image002  
Image003  
Image004  
Image005  
Image006  
Image007  
Image008  
Image009  
Image010  
DATA1  
[OK].  
2Press [3, 4] to select file type and press  
[OK].  
You cannot select folders  
that contain no compatible  
files.  
DATA2  
[USB]  
OK  
RETURN  
1Press [3, 4] to select “Drive Select” and  
press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select a folder and press [OK].  
2Press [3, 4] to select “USB” and press  
The file list for the folder appears.  
[OK].  
3Press [3, 4] to select the item and press  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
[OK].  
RQT9306  
30  
Regarding DivX VOD content  
Playing Music files  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
You can play MP3/WMA files recorded with a computer onto a DVD-  
R, DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.  
You cannot play MP3 or WMA files on the USB memory while  
recording or copying.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND:  
This DivX® Certified device must be registered in order to play DivX  
Video-on-Demand (VOD) content.  
First generate the DivX VOD registration code for your device and  
submit it during the registration process. [Important: DivX VOD  
content is protected by a DivX DRM (Digital Rights Management)  
system that restricts playback to registered DivX Certified devices. If  
you try to play DivX VOD content not authorized for your device, the  
message “Authorisation Error.” will be displayed and your content  
will not play.]  
1 Show MP3&WMA Menu screen.  
(> 30, Showing the menu screen)  
Selected group  
Display the unit’s registration code.  
(> 64, “DivX Registration” in “Others” tab)  
No.  
Group  
My favorite  
MP3&WMA Menu  
CD  
G: Group No.  
T: Track No. in the group  
TOTAL:  
Track No./Total tracks in  
all groups  
1
Total  
1
:
G
T
1
1
Track  
Tree  
DivX Registration  
001 Both Ends Freezing  
Setup  
TOTAL  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
002 Lady Starfish  
003 Life on Jupiter  
004 Metal Glue  
005 Paint ItYellow  
006 Pyjamamama  
007 Shrimps from Mars  
008 Starperson  
1/111  
DivX (R) Video On Demand  
Number  
Tuning  
0
9
8 alphanumeric characters  
Your registration code is : XXXXXXXX  
Disc  
Prev.  
Next  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
009 Velvet Cuppermine  
Files are treated as tracks and folders are treated as groups.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the track and  
press [OK].  
Connection  
Others  
OK  
RETURN  
After playing DivX VOD content for the first time, another  
registration code is then displayed in “DivX Registration”. Do not  
use this registration code to purchase DivX VOD content. If you  
use this code to purchase DivX VOD content, and then play the  
content on this unit, you will no longer be able to play any content  
that you purchased using the previous code.  
If you purchase DivX VOD content using a registration code  
different from this unit’s code, you will not be able to play this  
content. (“Authorisation Error.” is displayed.)  
Play starts on the selected track.  
0” indicates the track currently playing.  
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]  
[0] > [0] > [1] > [5]  
15:  
To stop playing  
Press [].  
Regarding DivX content that can only be played a set number of  
times  
Some DivX VOD content can only be played a set number of times.  
When you play this content, the remaining number of plays is  
displayed. You cannot play this content when the number of  
remaining plays is zero. (“Rental Expired.” is displayed.)  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Using the tree screen to find a group  
When playing this content  
The number of remaining plays is reduced by one if  
– you press [Í].  
– you press [].  
– you press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
– you press [:] or [6, 5] etc. and arrive at another content  
or the start of the content being played.  
– timer recording starts on the HDD.  
– you press [DRIVE SELECT] to change the drive.  
Resume functions do not work.  
1 While the file list is displayed  
Press [1] while a track is highlighted to display  
the tree screen.  
Selected group No. /Total groups  
If the group has no track, “– –” is displayed as group number.  
MP3&WMA Menu  
Tree  
CD  
MP3 music  
G
8
G
7/25  
T
14  
001 My favorite  
001 Brazilian pops  
002 Chinese pops  
003 Czech pops  
004 Hungarian pops  
005 Liner notes  
006 Japanese pops  
007 Mexican pops  
008 Philippine pops  
009 Swedish pops  
001 Momoko  
TOTAL  
40/111  
Number  
You cannot select  
groups that contain no  
compatible files.  
0
9
SELECT  
002 Standard number  
001 Piano solo  
OK  
RETURN  
002 Vocal  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a group and press  
[OK].  
The file list for the group appears.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
RQT9306  
31  
Playing DivX, Music files and still pictures (JPEG)  
Regarding Album View screen  
Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the  
shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
You can arrange these still pictures and create an album (> 42).  
Playing still pictures  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
[HDD] [RAM]  
You can play still pictures recorded with a computer onto a DVD-R,  
DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-RW and USB memory.  
You cannot play still pictures while recording or copying.  
Grouped by date  
002  
1 Show Album View screen.  
Total 68  
Date: 10.10. 2009  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
(> 30, Showing the menu screen)  
Number of pictures/Shooting date  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB]  
Album  
While stopped  
1
2
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
002  
When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the “Green”  
button to select “PICTURE”.  
10.10. 09  
Zoological park  
Total 24  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Album View  
HDD  
Album View screen  
MUSIC  
VIDEO  
- - -  
PICTURE  
001  
002  
Shooting date/Number of pictures/Album name  
Regarding Album View  
screen > right  
Total  
Date: 1. 1.2006  
5
Total  
Date: 1. 2.2006  
3
Depending on the digital camera, the editing software on the PC  
etc., the information about the recording date may not be  
displayed. In this case, the date will appear as [--.--.--].  
- - -  
- - -  
- - -  
Page 01/01  
OPTION  
Previous  
Next  
OK  
Press OK to show  
pictures.  
Slideshow  
RETURN  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen icons  
Picture and folder protected.  
Album that has not yet been viewed ([HDD] [RAM])  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
album and press [OK].  
You can also select album with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] > [0] > [5]  
15: [0] > [1] > [5]  
115: [1] > [1] > [5]  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Picture (JPEG) View  
HDD  
e.g., HDD  
PICTURE  
Album Name 103__DVD  
0001  
0005  
0009  
0002  
0006  
----  
0003  
0007  
----  
0004  
0008  
----  
Page 001/001  
Previous  
Next  
OK  
Slideshow  
OPTION  
RETURN  
3 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still  
picture and press [OK].  
You can also select still pictures with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]  
115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5]  
15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]  
1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]  
Press [2, 1] to display the previous or next still picture.  
Useful functions during still picture play (> 33)  
To return to the Album View screen or Picture (JPEG) View  
screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
RQT9306  
32  
Useful functions during still picture play  
You can display still pictures one by one at a constant interval.  
Start  
While the Album View screen is displayed  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album.  
2 Press [1] (PLAY).  
You can also start Slideshow with the following steps.  
While the Album View screen is displayed  
1 Press [OPTION].  
Slideshow  
Slideshow  
Setting  
Start Slideshow  
Slideshow Setting  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Slideshow Setting”and press [OK].  
3 Set required settings and press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Set” and then press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the desired album and press [OPTION].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select “Start Slideshow” and press [OK].  
To change the display interval  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Display interval” in step 3.  
Press [2, 1] to select the desired interval (“Normal”, “Long” or “Short”).  
Repeat Play  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play” in step 3.  
Press [2, 1] to select “On” or “Off”.  
Slideshow with music  
You can add music to Slideshow.  
Slideshow Setting  
Please set the following items.  
1
2
3
4
5
Press [3, 4] to select “Soundtrack” in step 3 (> above).  
Press [2, 1] to select “On”.  
Press [3, 4] to select “Select Soundtrack” and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select the storage location of soundtrack and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select an album for soundtrack and press [OK].  
Display interval  
Repeat Play  
Normal  
On  
Soundtrack  
On  
Select Soundtrack  
Album001  
Cancel  
Set  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
Note  
Music albums on HDD and on USB memory can be used as the slideshow  
Soundtrack. However, when selecting still images on USB memory for the slideshow, music albums on the USB  
memory cannot be used as the soundtrack. (Even if a music album on USB memory is selected, the music is not  
played.)  
While playing  
Rotate RIGHT  
Rotate LEFT  
1 Press [OPTION].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Rotate RIGHT” or “Rotate LEFT” and press [OK].  
Rotate RIGHT  
Rotate LEFT  
Rotation information will not be stored.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] Still pictures  
When disc or album is protected  
When played on other equipment  
When copying pictures  
When changing date  
While playing  
Zoom in  
Zoom out  
1 Press [OPTION].  
Rotate RIGHT  
Rotate LEFT  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Zoom in” and press [OK].  
Zoom in  
To return the picture to its original size, press [3, 4] to select “Zoom out” in step 2 and press [OK].  
When zooming in, the picture may be cut off.  
The enlargement information will not be stored.  
The “Zoom in/Zoom out” function is only available for still pictures smaller than 640 a 480 pixels.  
While playing  
e.g., HDD  
Properties  
18:53:50 11.10.  
Folder - Picture No. 103 - 0006  
Date 10. 10. 2009 No.  
Press [STATUS  
] twice.  
3 / 9  
To exit the picture properties screen  
Press [STATUS ].  
Shooting date  
RQT9306  
33  
Playing music  
To play music CD  
Useful functions during music play  
Operations during play  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
Press [].  
Stop  
The stopped position is memorized.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart from this position.  
If [] is pressed several times, the position is  
cleared.  
1 Insert a music CD.  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
The position is cleared if the unit is turned off.  
CD  
Press [;].  
Pause  
Play Music  
Copy Music  
Press [;] again or [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Press [6] or [5].  
The speed increases up to 5 steps.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
Search  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
During play or while paused, press [:] or  
[9].  
Skip to the track you want to play.  
Each press increases the number of skips.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Play Music”  
Skip  
and press [OK].  
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database (> 52)  
and searches for the title information.  
You can select the item which you want to repeat.  
Repeat  
P O W E R E D B Y  
Play  
While playing  
[HDD]  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Repeat Play Setting”  
and press [OK].  
3
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
Select “Off” to cancel repeat play.  
You can change the order of the Album View  
alphabetically.  
Sort  
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found  
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].  
[HDD]  
While Album View screen is displayed  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and  
1
2
3
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Sort” and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Album Name” and  
press [OK].  
press [OK].  
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] > [5]  
To cancel the sorted screen  
Press [3, 4] to select “No.” and press [OK].  
15: [1] > [5]  
While Track View screen is displayed  
Properties  
1
2
Press [OPTION].  
Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” and press  
[OK].  
To exit the screen  
[HDD] [CD]  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Playback continues.  
To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].  
To play music recorded on HDD  
Copying music to HDD (> 52)  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to  
select “MUSIC”.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the album and  
press [OK].  
You can also select the album with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] > [0] > [5]  
115: [1] > [1] > [5]  
15: [0] > [1] > [5]  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the track and  
press [OK].  
You can also select the track with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
5:  
[0] > [0] > [0] > [5]  
115: [0] > [1] > [1] > [5]  
15: [0] > [0] > [1] > [5]  
1115: [1] > [1] > [1] > [5]  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Note  
You cannot play music tracks on HDD while recording or copying.  
RQT9306  
34  
Convenient functions  
To pause the TV programme you are  
watching—Pause Live TV  
You can pause the TV programme you are watching using this unit’s  
tuner and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is  
useful when you have to briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.  
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme  
temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.  
FUNCTION MENU Display  
By using the FUNCTION MENU Display you may access the main  
functions quickly and easily.  
If “FUNCTION MENU Display” is set to “On” in the Setup menu,  
FUNCTION MENU automatically appears when you turn the power  
on. (> 62)  
1 Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Functions displayed depend on the selected drive or type of  
disc.  
1 Turn on the television and select the  
appropriate AV input to suit the  
connections to this unit.  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
Playback  
Recording  
Delete  
Video  
Picture  
Music  
2 Turn on this unit and press [W X CH]  
Copy  
to select the channel.  
TV Guide  
Others  
Drive Select  
3
When you want to pause the TV programme  
OK  
RETURN  
Press [;].  
HDD  
2 Press [3, 4] to select a function and  
4
DVB  
ABC  
L
R
press [OK].  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
Playback  
Recording  
Delete  
Video  
Picture  
Music  
Copy  
TV Guide  
Others  
This icon indicates that Pause Live TV is working. You can  
turn off this icon (> 62, Pause Live TV Icon).  
Drive Select  
OK  
RETURN  
4
When you want to resume  
If you press [RETURN ], you can return to the previous  
screen.  
Press [1] (PLAY)  
The programme is saved on the HDD in SP recording mode  
(> 20) regardless of the recording mode and the drive  
selected before starting saving.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select an item and  
press [OK].  
At least 1 hour up to 8 hours of TV programmes can be  
temporarily saved on the HDD. (This may vary depending  
on the HDD free space.)  
Refer to “Easy access to various functions — FUNCTION  
MENU Display” about each function. (> 7)  
Operation during Pause Live TV  
To exit the FUNCTION MENU Display  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Press [6, 5].  
Search  
Pause  
Press [;].  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart.  
Press and hold [1] (PLAY/a1.3).  
Press again to return to the normal speed.  
Quick View  
While paused, press [6] or  
Slow-  
motion  
[5].  
The speed increases up to 5 steps.  
Press [1] (PLAY) to restart play.  
1 Press [].  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes”  
and press [OK].  
Stop Pause  
Live TV  
Note  
The Pause Live TV function automatically stops when a timer  
recording starts.  
The Pause Live TV function does not work  
when the clock is not set  
while recording  
while timer recording  
Audio cannot be switched during resume play.  
The first 30 minutes is deleted every 30 minutes after the HDD is  
full or the saving lasts 8 hours.  
The Pause Live TV function stops automatically 24 hours after  
started.  
RQT9306  
35  
Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)  
You can enjoy linked operations with the TV and receiver by using  
“HDAVI Control”.  
Preparation  
1
Connect this unit to your TV using an HDMI cable or to your  
receiver using an HDMI cable (> 67).  
Set “VIERA Link” to “On” (> 63). (The default setting is “On”.)  
Set the “HDAVI Control” operations on the connected equipment  
(e.g., TV).  
Set the input channel on VIERA to suit the terminal to be  
What is VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”?  
2
3
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control” is a convenient function that  
offers linked operations of this unit, and a Panasonic TV  
(VIERA) or receiver under “HDAVI Control”. You can use this  
function by connecting the equipment with the HDMI cable.  
See the operating instructions for connected equipment for  
operational details.  
VIERA Link “HDAVI Control”, based on the control functions  
provided by HDMI which is an industry standard known as HDMI  
CEC (Consumer Electronics Control), is a unique function that  
we have developed and added. As such, its operation with other  
manufacturers’ equipment that supports HDMI CEC cannot be  
guaranteed.  
used as “HDAVI Control”.  
4
Turn on all “HDAVI Control” compatible equipment and select this  
unit’s input channel on the connected TV so that the “HDAVI  
Control” function works properly.  
Also when the connection or settings are changed, repeat  
this procedure.  
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.  
“HDAVI Control 4” is the newest standard (current as of  
December, 2008) for Panasonic’s HDAVI Control compatible  
equipment. This standard is compatible with Panasonic’s  
conventional HDAVI equipment.  
Please refer to individual manuals for other manufacturers’  
equipment supporting VIERA Link function.  
What you can do with “HDAVI Control”  
Download from the TV§1  
When you connect the unit to a TV for the first time, the station list data etc. are automatically copied from the TV to the unit and the TV stations  
are assigned to the programme positions on the unit in the same order as on the TV (> 9).  
Easy playback  
When the TV is on and the following operations are performed, the TV’s input will automatically switch to HDMI input mode and the TV displays  
the corresponding action.  
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)  
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§2, [1] (PLAY)§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [G-Code], [PROG/CHECK] etc.  
Power on link  
When the TV is off and the following operations are performed, the TV will automatically turn on and displays the corresponding action.  
(Picture or sound may not be available for the first few seconds.)  
Press [FUNCTION MENU]§2, [1] (PLAY)§3, [DIRECT NAVIGATOR], [GUIDE], [G-Code], [PROG/CHECK] etc.  
[DVD-V] [CD] [VCD] and MP3/WMA  
The TV is automatically turned on when you insert the discs.  
Power off link  
When you set the TV to standby mode, the unit is also automatically set to standby mode. The unit is automatically set to standby mode even if  
the FUNCTION MENU screen etc. is displayed during playback or when the unit set to a timer recording.  
Even if the TV is set to standby mode, the unit will not be set to standby mode at the same time when recording, copying, finalising etc.  
When this unit is connected to an “HDAVI Control” compatible Panasonic receiver with an HDMI cable, the receiver will also turn off.  
About the Standby Power Save function§4  
Even with “Power Save” set to “Off” (> 64) (Quick Start mode), this unit turns to “Power Save” states (> 9) when Power off link works, so it is  
possible to reduce the power consumption while this unit is in standby mode.  
“Standby Power Save” setting is required to be activated on the TV.  
When turning this unit on or off without using Power off link function, this unit will not turn to “Power Save” states.  
§1 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.  
§2 This button is available only when this unit is on.  
§3 When this button is pressed, the playback image is not immediately displayed on the screen and it may not be possible to watch the contents  
from where playback started.  
In this case, press [:] or [6] to go back to where playback started.  
§4 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 4”.  
Note  
These functions may not work normally depending on the equipment condition.  
About “HDAVI Control” function, read the manual of the connected equipment (e.g., TV) too.  
RQT9306  
36  
Easy control only with VIERA remote control  
If you connect this unit to the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later with an HDMI cable, you can enjoy using more convenient functions.  
You can operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.  
The buttons that you can use for this unit vary depending on the TV. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the TV.  
Use the remote control supplied with this unit if you cannot operate this unit using buttons on the TV remote control.  
The operation of this unit may be interrupted when you press incompatible buttons on the TV remote control.  
The TV displays the TV tuner’s picture when the linked operation is finished.  
Using the FUNCTION MENU Display to operate this unit§1  
FUNCTION MENU  
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
1 Display this unit’s “FUNCTION MENU Display” using the TV remote control.  
Playback  
Recording  
Delete  
Video  
Picture  
Music  
If this unit is set to standby mode, it will automatically turn on.  
2 Select the item you want to operate with the TV remote control, and press  
[OK].  
About the FUNCTION MENU Display (> 7, 35).  
Copy  
TV Guide  
Others  
Drive Select  
OK  
RETURN  
Pause live TV programme§2  
You can pause the TV programme you are watching and resume later by temporarily saving it on the HDD. This is useful when you have to  
briefly stop watching TV to run an errand.  
If you stop the Pause Live TV function, then the TV programme temporarily saved on the HDD will be deleted.  
Refer to the TV operating instructions for operating the TV.  
1 When you want to pause the TV programme  
Turn on the “Pause Live TV” function using the TV remote control.  
This unit turns on automatically.  
2 When you want to resume  
Display the Control Panel (> below) and press [OK].  
The TV programme resumes.  
To stop Pause Live TV  
Press [4] while the Control Panel is displayed.  
(> 35, To pause the TV programme you are watching—Pause Live TV)  
Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit§1  
By using the TV remote control, you can play discs using the “Control Panel” (> below) and display the Top Menu for DVD-Video.  
Switch to TV  
Displayed when watching with the tuner of  
this unit. It will return to the TV picture.  
1 Press [OPTION].  
e,g.,  
Control Panel  
Control Panel is displayed (> below).  
Control Panel  
FUNCTION MENU  
Top Menu  
FUNCTION MENU  
FUNCTION MENU Display is displayed  
(> above).  
Menu  
Top Menu [DVD-V]  
Menu [DVD-V]  
Top menu is displayed (> 15).  
Menu is displayed (> 15).  
Drive Select  
Note  
Drive Select  
Select the HDD or DVD drive  
Rotate the still picture (> 33).  
You cannot use the OPTION menu while the Top Menu for DVD-  
Video is displayed and while DVD-Video is being copied.  
Rotate RIGHT (JPEG)  
Rotate LEFT (JPEG)  
2 Select an item then press [OK].  
Zoom in (JPEG)  
Zoom out (JPEG)  
Enlarge or shrink the still picture (> 33).  
Using the Control Panel  
Using the Control Panel, you can operate search backward, search forward, stop, etc, with the TV remote control.  
Select “Control Panel” and press [OK] in step 2 of “Using the OPTION menu window to operate this unit§1” (> above).  
The Control Panel is displayed (> right).  
Control Panel  
When playing a title or DVD-Video, etc.  
Pause  
[3]: Pause, [4]: Stop, [2]: Search backward, [1]: Search forward, [OK]: Play, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.  
While playing still pictures  
[4]: Stop, [2]: View previous picture, [1]: View next picture, [EXIT]: Exit the Control Panel.  
Exit  
Search  
Search  
Play  
Stop  
§1 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 2” or later.  
§2 This function is available with the TV that supports “HDAVI Control 3” or later.  
When you want to leave the TV on and set only this unit to standby mode  
Press [Í] on this unit’s remote control and set to standby mode.  
When not using “HDAVI Control”  
Set “VIERA Link” in the Setup menu to “Off” (> 63).  
RQT9306  
37  
Editing  
Editing titles/chapters  
[HDD] [RAM]  
1
During play or while stopped  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] (You cannot edit finalised discs.)  
[+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
[HDD] [RAM] When “VIDEO” is not selected, press the “Red”  
Chapter  
button to select “VIDEO”.  
Each section between the division points becomes a chapter.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title.  
Title  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Grouped Titles  
Title View screen  
MUSIC  
VIDEO  
PICTURE  
HDD  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
008  
10.10.  
11.10.  
[HDD] [RAM] You can change the order of chapters and create a  
playlist (> 40).  
Previous  
Next  
Select Previous  
Page 02/02  
“Chapter Creation” in the Setup menu (> 61)  
“Automatic”:  
OK  
Next  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Detects changes (special mute points like the start and the end of  
the programme) in the scene during recording and sets chapter  
start points on them automatically.  
Depending on the programme to be recorded or the Recording  
Mode, the chapter start points may not be created correctly.  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
“5 minutes”:  
Sets chapter start points automatically during recording at  
approximately 5-minute interval.  
3 Press [OPTION].  
The maximum number of items on a disc:  
[HDD]  
Titles: 499  
Chapters: Approx. 1000 per title  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Titles: 99 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] 49 titles)  
Chapters: Approx. 1000 ([+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Approx. 254)  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the operation  
and press [OK].  
If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and  
press [OK].  
Enter Title Name  
Set up Protection  
Note  
Cancel Protection  
Refer to “Title  
Once deleted, divided or partially deleted, recorded content cannot  
be restored to its original state. Make certain before proceeding.  
You cannot edit during recording or copying, etc.  
Restricted recording information remains even after editing (e.g.  
dividing a title etc).  
Partial Delete  
Change Thumbnail  
Divide Title  
Delete  
Properties  
Edit  
operations”  
(> 39).  
Find Titles  
To search programmes on TV Guide  
(> 27)  
To edit the group of titles [HDD] (> 29)  
(> below)  
[+R] [+R]DL] Each time you edit a title the information is saved to the  
free space on the disc. If you do this numerous times, the amount  
of free space decreases.  
Create Group  
Release Grouping  
Chapter View  
Table Display  
All Titles  
We recommend that you edit on the HDD and then copy to disc.  
Switching the DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
appearance (> 29)  
Editing titles/chapters and playing  
chapters  
You can modify (remove unnecessary parts, divide, etc.) recorded  
programmes.  
PICTURE/MUSIC  
Playing still pictures (> 32)  
To play music recorded on HDD (> 34)  
Preparation  
If you select “Chapter View”  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit  
the connection to this unit.  
Turn the unit on.  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded  
title to be edited.  
5 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
chapter.  
To start play > Press [OK].  
To edit > Step 6.  
[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Chapter View  
HDD  
Chapter View screen  
VIDEO  
008 ARD 11.10.  
0:31.24  
To show other pages/Multiple editing (> above)  
6 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
Delete Chapter  
Create Chapter  
Refer to “Chapter  
operations” (> 39).  
Combine Chapters  
Title View  
You can go back to Title View.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
RQT9306  
38  
Title operations  
After performing steps 1–4 (> 38)  
Delete§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
The available recording space on DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL does not increase when you delete  
titles.  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW increases only when the last recorded  
title is deleted. It does not increase if other titles are deleted (> 18).  
Properties  
Information (e.g., time and date) is shown.  
Press [OK] to exit the screen.  
Properties  
Dinosaur  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
No.  
026  
Time  
12:19  
Date 11.10.2009 MON Rec time 0:30 (SP)  
Channel ARD  
You can give names to recorded titles.  
(> 44, Entering text)  
[HDD] Even if the group name is changed, the title names in the group will not be changed.  
Enter Title Name  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Set up Protection§  
If set, this will protect the title from accidental deletion.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR All Tit  
HDD  
Cancel Protection§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The lock symbol appears when the title is protected.  
007  
008  
[HDD] [RAM] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
ARD 11.10.  
You can remove unnecessary part of the recording.  
1Press [OK] at the start point and end point of the  
section you want to delete.  
Partial Delete  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Partial Delete  
HDD  
VIDEO  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
Start  
End  
(> below, For your reference)  
Next  
Finish  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
Select “Next” and press [OK] to delete other sections.  
0:43.21  
3Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Start  
End  
- -:- -.- -  
- -:- -.- -  
You can change an image to be shown as the thumbnail picture in the Title  
View.  
1Press [1] (PLAY) to start play.  
2Press [OK] when the image you want to use as a  
Change Thumbnail  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR ChangeThumbnail  
HDD  
VIDEO  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›]  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
  
008  
Change  
Finish  
(> below, For your reference)  
thumbnail is shown.  
To change the thumbnail  
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Change”, then press [OK] at  
the point you want to change.  
0:00.00  
Start play and select the image  
Change  
- -:- -.- -  
of a thumbnail.  
3Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
You can divide a title into two.  
Divide Title  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
Divide Title  
VIDEO  
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide the title.  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
Preview  
Divide  
(> below, For your reference)  
3Press [2, 1] to select “Divide” and press [OK].  
Finish  
To confirm the division point  
0:43.21  
Press [3, 4] to select “Preview” and press [OK]. (The unit plays  
10 seconds before and after the division point.)  
To change the division point  
Restart play and press [3, 4] to select “Divide”, then press [OK] at the point where you want to divide the  
title.  
Note  
The divided titles retain the title name and CPRM property (> 81) of the original title.  
Video and audio just before and after the dividing point may momentarily cut out.  
[HDD] Divided titles form a group of titles.  
§
Multiple editing is possible.  
Chapter operations  
After performing steps 1–6 (> 38)  
Delete Chapter§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
Select “Combine Chapters” (> below) when you only want to delete the division point between chapters.  
(The recorded contents will not be deleted.)  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Select the point where you want to start a new chapter while viewing the  
title.  
Create Chapter  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR Create Chapter  
VIDEO  
HDD  
[HDD] [RAM]  
008  
PLAY  
1Press [OK] at the point you want to divide.  
(> below, For your reference)  
Create  
Finish  
Repeat this step to divide at other points.  
2Press [3, 4] to select “Finish” and press [OK].  
0:43.21  
Press [2, 1] to select “Combine” and press [OK].  
The selected chapter and following chapter are combined.  
Combine Chapters  
[HDD] [RAM]  
§
Multiple editing is possible.  
For your reference  
Use Search (> 28), Time Slip (> 28) to find the desired point.  
To find the desired point correctly, use Slow-motion (> 28) and Frame-by-frame (> 28).  
To skip to the start or end of a title, press [:] (start) or [9] (end).  
RQT9306  
39  
Creating, editing and playing playlists  
You can arrange the chapters (> 38) to create a playlist.  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Create”  
Title  
Title  
and press [OK].  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Chapter  
Playlists  
HDD  
- -  
Playlist View  
- -  
- -  
Create  
-  
- -  
- -  
Playlist  
Chapter  
Chapter  
5 Press [2, 1] to select the source title  
and press [4].  
Press [OK] to select all the chapters in the title, then skip to  
step 7.  
Copying (> 45) a playlist will create a title.  
Playlists are not recorded separately so this doesn’t use much  
capacity.  
Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and  
source chapters.  
You cannot create or edit playlists while recording or copying.  
Create  
Playlists  
HDD  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
002  
002  
---  
---  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
[HDD] [RAM]  
The maximum number of items on a disc:  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
---  
Playlists: 99  
OK  
OPTION  
Press RETURN to finish.  
Chapters in playlists: Approx. 1000  
(Depends on the state of recording.)  
If you exceed the maximum numbers of items for a disc, all the  
items entered will not be recorded.  
RETURN  
6 Press [2, 1] to select the chapter you  
want to add to a playlist and press  
[OK].  
Creating playlists  
Press [3] to cancel.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Preparation  
Create  
Playlists  
HDD  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Turn on the television and select the appropriate AV input to suit  
the connection to this unit.  
Turn the unit on.  
002  
002  
---  
---  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive containing the recorded  
title to be edited.  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
---  
[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).  
You cannot create or edit a playlist while recording or while  
copying.  
Playlists must be made in accordance with the encoding system  
currently selected in “TV System” (> 63).  
OK  
OPTION  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
You can also create a new chapter from the source title.  
Press [OPTION] to select “Create Chapter” and press [OK]  
(> 39, Create Chapter).  
7 Press [2, 1] to select the position to  
1
While stopped  
insert the chapter and press [OK].  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Playlists  
HDD  
Create  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and  
001 ARD 11.10. SAT  
Source Title  
001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
Page 001/001  
002  
002  
---  
---  
press [OK].  
Source Chapter  
001  
003  
---  
---  
---  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and  
Chapters in Playlist  
---  
---  
press [OK].  
OK  
FUNCTION MENU  
Press RETURN to finish.  
RETURN  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
Playback  
Recording  
Delete  
Press [3] to select other source titles.  
Repeat steps 6–7 to add other chapters.  
Playlists  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
HDD Management  
Setup  
Copy  
8 Press [RETURN ].  
TV Guide  
Others  
All the selected scenes become the playlist.  
Drive Select  
OK  
RETURN  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT9306  
40  
Playlist operations  
Editing and playing playlists/chapters  
After performing steps 1–5 (> left)  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-RW‹VR›] (Play only)  
Delete§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press  
[OK].  
Once deleted, the playlists are lost and  
cannot be restored.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Make certain before proceeding.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and  
Playlist information (e.g., total time and date)  
is shown.  
Properties  
press [OK].  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[-RW‹VR›]  
Properties  
Press [OK] to  
exit the screen.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Playlists” and  
Dinosaur  
No.  
10  
Date 12.10.2009 TUE  
press [OK].  
Chapters 002 Total 0:30.53  
RETURN  
OK  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
playlist.  
(> 40, Creating playlists, Step 5–8)  
Create  
To start play > Press [OK].  
To edit > Step 5.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Playlists  
HDD  
01  
Playlist View  
- -  
Playlist View screen  
Copy§  
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and press  
[OK].  
The copied playlist becomes the newest  
one in the playlist view screen.  
- -  
[HDD] [RAM]  
12.10. SUN 0:30  
- -  
Create  
- -  
- -  
To show other pages/Multiple editing (> 38)  
5 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
You can give names to playlists.  
(> 44, Entering text)  
Enter  
Name  
[HDD] [RAM]  
If you select “Edit”, press [3, 4] to select the operation and  
(> 39, Change Thumbnail)  
Change  
press [OK].  
Thumbnail  
Create  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Copy  
Refer to “Playlist  
Enter Name  
§
Multiple editing is possible.  
Delete  
operations”.  
Change Thumbnail  
Properties  
Chapter operations  
Edit  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Chapter View  
After performing steps 1–7 (> left)  
Editing chapters in a playlist does not modify the source titles and  
source chapters.  
If you select “Chapter View”  
(> 40, Creating playlists, Step 5–7)  
Add  
Chapter  
6 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
chapter.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the position  
to insert the chapter and press [OK].  
Move  
Chapter  
To start play > Press [OK].  
To edit > Step 7.  
Playlists  
HDD  
Move Chapter  
Playlists  
HDD  
Chapter View  
Chapter View screen  
01 12.10. SUN 0:11  
002  
01 ARD 12.10. SUN 0:30  
001  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
001  
002  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
0:10.24  
0:19.36  
0:10.24  
0:19.36  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
---  
To show -o-- ther pages/Multiple editing (> 38)  
7 Press [OPTION], then [3, 4] to select  
the operation and press [OK].  
Previous  
Page 01/01  
Next  
OK  
(> 39, Create Chapter)  
Create  
Chapter  
Add Chapter  
Move Chapter  
Refer to “Chapter  
operations”.  
(> 39, Combine Chapters)  
Combine  
Chapters  
Create Chapter  
Combine Chapters  
Delete Chapter  
(> 39, Delete Chapter)  
The playlist itself is deleted if you delete all  
the chapters in it.  
Playlist View  
Delete  
Chapter§  
You can go back to Playlist View.  
§
Multiple editing is possible.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT9306  
41  
Editing still pictures and music  
Album (still picture) and picture operation  
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)  
Editing still pictures (JPEG)  
[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and  
Delete  
You can edit pictures and albums.  
You cannot edit still pictures recorded on DVD-R DL, CD-R/CD-  
RW and USB memory.  
press [OK].  
Picture§  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are  
lost and cannot be restored. Make certain  
Delete  
You cannot edit still pictures recorded on finalised DVD-R.  
before proceeding.  
When deleting an album, files other than the  
still picture files inside the album will also be  
deleted. (This does not apply to folders under  
the album concerned.)  
[-R] Available space does not increase even  
after pictures are deleted.  
Album§  
Preparation  
[HDD]  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD.  
[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).  
[-R] (JPEG)  
[RAM]  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
[HDD] [RAM] When “PICTURE” is not selected, press the  
You can change the date of the picture.  
1 Press [2, 1] to select the item and press  
[3, 4] to change.  
2 Press [OK].  
Change  
“Green” button to select “PICTURE”.  
Date§  
2
Editing an album:  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Select the album to be edited and  
press [OPTION].  
You can give names to albums.  
(> 44, Entering text)  
Album names input using this unit may not be  
displayed on other equipment.  
Enter  
Album  
When you want to create an album using “Create Album”,  
Name  
press [OPTION] without selecting album.  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Editing a still picture:  
1Select the album which contains the still  
picture to edit and press [OK].  
2Select the still pictures to edit and press  
[OPTION].  
Set up  
If set, this will protect the  
still picture or album from  
accidental deletion.  
Press [2, 1] to  
select “Yes” and  
press [OK].  
The lock symbol appears  
when the still picture or album is protected.  
Even if the protection setting is used by this  
unit to protect an album, the album may be  
deleted by another unit.  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR  
HDD  
P
Protection§  
103_  
Album Name  
0001  
0002  
Cancel  
Protection§  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press  
[OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple editing  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
0005  
0006  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Information (e.g., image size and file size) is  
shown.  
To exit the Properties screen, press [OK].  
Properties  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R]  
[-R]DL] [CD]  
[USB]  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation  
and press [OK].  
To edit the album  
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” or “Yes”  
and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album  
that contains the still picture you want to  
add and press [OK].  
Add  
(e.g., [HDD])  
Pictures  
Useful functions during still picture  
play (> 33)  
Create  
Start Slideshow  
Album  
Slideshow Setting  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and press  
[OK].  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Add Pictures  
Create Album  
Edit Album  
Delete Album  
Change Date  
If “Select pictures to copy” is selected:  
Select the still picture you want to add and  
press [OK].  
Set up Protection  
Cancel Protection  
If “Copy all pictures” is selected:  
All the still pictures in the album will be copied.  
Copy to DVD  
4 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and  
press [OK].  
VIDEO/MUSIC  
If you want to continue copying, select  
Yes” and go to step 2.  
Album (still picture) and picture operation  
(> right)  
Only for “Create Album”  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” or “No” and  
press [OK].  
To edit still picture  
(e.g., [HDD])  
If “Yes” is selected:  
You can give names to albums. (> 44,  
Entering text)  
If “No” is selected:  
The album name is automatically given.  
Delete Picture  
Properties  
Album (still picture) and picture  
operation (> right)  
Change Date  
Set up Protection  
Cancel Protection  
For copy to DVD-RAM or HDD  
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
press [OK].  
Copy to  
DVD§  
You can go back to Album View.  
Album View  
[HDD]  
For copy to DVD-R  
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &  
Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press  
[OK].  
Copy to  
HDD§  
[RAM]  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
Use blank discs or unfinalised discs on which  
JPEG images are recorded with this unit.  
§
Multiple editing is possible.  
[Change Date : Only when the “Picture (JPEG) View” screen is  
displayed]  
Note  
Timer recordings do not start when performing “Change Date”,  
“Copy to DVD”, “Copy to HDD”, “Add Pictures” or “Create Album”.  
RQT9306  
42  
Editing music  
[HDD]  
Deleting still pictures and music using  
DELETE Navigator  
[HDD] [-R] (JPEG) [RAM]  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD drive.  
1
While stopped  
1 Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
When “MUSIC” is not selected, press the “Yellow” button to  
select “MUSIC”.  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete” and  
2
Editing an album:  
press [OK].  
Press [3, 4] to select the album and  
press [OPTION].  
3
[HDD] [RAM]  
Editing a track  
Press [3, 4] to select “Picture” or  
“Music”.  
1Press [3, 4] to select the album and press  
[OK].  
4 Press [OK].  
2Press [3, 4] to select the track and press  
[OPTION].  
5
Deleting an album  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the operation  
and press [OK].  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the item  
and press [DELETE ¢].  
Deleting a still picture or track  
To edit the album (Music)  
1Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the album  
which contains the still picture or track to  
delete and press [OK].  
2Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still  
picture or track and press [OK].  
Delete Album  
Album and track operation (> below)  
Enter Album Name  
Repeat Play Setting  
Useful functions during music play (> 34)  
Track View  
Sort  
You can confirm the item that you have selected using the  
option menu.  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View” (> 42,  
step 3).  
Selecting recorded programmes (titles) to  
play—DIRECT NAVIGATOR (> 29)  
Playing still pictures (> 32)  
VIDEO/PICTURE  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Picture (JPEG)  
View” (> 42, step 3).  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Album View  
(Music)” (> left, step 3).  
Refer to option menu operations for the “Track View (Music)”  
(> left, step 3).  
> below  
To edit the track (Music)  
Delete Track  
Album and track operation (> below)  
Properties  
To show other pages [Album (still picture) and still  
picture only]  
Enter Track Name  
Enter Artist Name  
Repeat Play Setting  
Album View  
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Multiple deleting [Album (still picture) and still picture  
only]  
Select with [3, 4, 2, 1] and press [;]. (Repeat.)  
A check mark appears. Press [;] again to cancel.  
You can go back to Album View  
Useful functions during music play (> 34)  
6 Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
press [OK].  
The item is deleted.  
To exit the screen  
Press [DIRECT NAVIGATOR].  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
Album and track operation  
After performing steps 1-3 (> above)  
Delete Album  
Delete Track  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and  
press [OK].  
Once deleted, the recorded contents  
are lost and cannot be restored. Make  
certain before proceeding.  
Enter Album Name  
Enter Track Name  
You can give names to albums and tracks.  
(> 44, Entering text)  
Enter Artist Name  
You can edit the artist name of the track.  
(> 44, Entering text)  
Note  
When the timer recording starts, editing music stops on the way.  
RQT9306  
43  
Entering text  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
character and press [OK].  
You can give names to recorded titles, etc.  
Repeat this step to enter other characters.  
The maximum number of characters:  
To delete a character  
[HDD] [RAM]  
Characters  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the character in the name field  
and press [;]. (The selected characters are deleted.)  
64 (44§)  
Title  
Playlist  
64  
Using the numbered buttons to enter characters  
Album of still pictures  
Album (CD) ([HDD])  
36  
e.g., entering the letter “R”  
40  
5
1 Press [7] to move to the 7th row.  
2 Press [7] twice to highlight “R”.  
3 Press [OK].  
J
K
N
Q
U
L
Track (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])  
Artist (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])  
Disc ([RAM])  
40  
7
7
7
40  
6 M  
O
R
V
64  
To enter a space  
Press [DELETE ¢] and press  
[OK].  
§Title name for timer recording  
P
T
S
7
8
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
Characters  
Title  
Disc  
44  
40  
3 Press [] (Set).  
Broadcast  
Characters  
14  
To end partway  
Press [RETURN ].  
Favourite 1–4  
Text is not added.  
Note  
To add a name  
If a name is long, parts of it may not be shown in some screens.  
You can add frequently used names and recall them later.  
Maximum number of added names: 20  
Maximum number of characters per name: 44  
After entering the name (steps 1-2).  
1 Show Enter Name screen etc.  
Title (timer recording)  
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Add to List” and press [OK].  
You can also press [9] to select “Add to List”.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Add” and press [OK].  
Select “Programme Name”. (> 23, Manually programming  
timer recordings, step 3)  
2
Press [RETURN ] to cancel.  
Free Word Search  
Press [OPTION]. (> 27, “Searching by entering words”)  
Find Titles  
Select “Find Titles”. (> 27, “Searching using programme  
information of titles recorded to the HDD”, step 4)  
To recall an added name  
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].  
You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be recalled and  
press [OK].  
2
Title  
Select “Enter Title Name”. (> 38, step 4)  
To delete an added name  
Playlist  
Select “Enter Name”. (> 41, step 5)  
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Name List” and press [OK].  
You can also press [:] to select “Name List”.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the name to be deleted.  
Press [OPTION] to show “Delete Name” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Delete” and press [OK].  
Press [RETURN ].  
Album of still pictures  
Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 42, Editing still pictures  
(JPEG), step 3)  
2
3
4
5
Album (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])  
Select “Enter Album Name”. (> 43, Editing music, step 3)  
Track (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])  
Select “Enter Track Name”. (> 43, Editing music, step 3)  
For your reference  
If you enter a long name, only part of it is shown in the Top Menu  
after finalisation (> 58). When entering a title name, the name that  
will appear in the Top Menu can be previewed in “Top Menu  
Preview” window.  
Artist (CD/MP3/WMA) ([HDD])  
Select “Enter Artist Name”. (> 43, Editing music, step 3)  
Disc  
Select “Disc Name”. (> 56, Providing a name for a disc,  
Enter Name  
Chapter 1_  
step 1)  
_
Favourite 1–4  
Press the “Red” button. (> 59, To change the name of a  
Favourite in the “Favourite” column, step 2)  
1
2
3
4
1
A
D
G
2
B
E
H
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
d
g
6
b
e
h
7
c
f
8
/
9
$
0
Top Menu Preview  
Chapter 1  
*
%
i
7
&
Name field: shows the text you have entered  
Enter Name  
_
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
1
A
D
G
J
2
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
,
3
C
F
I
4
5
a
6
b
e
7
c
f
8
9
0
Top Menu Preview  
   
*
d
g
j
/
  
%
h
k
i
  
$
&
@
_
L
O
R
V
Y
?
l
   
Delete  
m
n
o
[
]
(
}
\
M
P
T
Add to List  
Name List  
S
p
t
q
u
x
'
r
s
{
)
-
v
W
.
Z
!
w
"
y
:
z
;
|
S
SELECT  
et  
^
`
Space  
RETURN  
OK  
RQT9306  
44  
ying  
Copying titles or playlists  
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]  
Advanced Copy  
Features  
Easy copying from HDD to DVD with no difficult  
settings.  
Make a copy list and then copy.  
You can set the unit to copy titles or playlists in the  
way you want.  
Copy direction  
HDD > DVD  
DVD > HDD  
[RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [+RW]  
[DVD-V] (Only from a finalised disc)  
High speed mode copy§1  
[DVD-V] You cannot perform high-speed copy with finalised discs.  
[+RW] You cannot perform high-speed copy from +RW to HDD.  
§2  
Changing recording mode  
Finalise§3  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Automatically finalised  
Can be selected  
High speed mode  
Normal speed mode  
High speed mode  
Normal speed mode  
Copying playlists§4  
§5  
§5  
Are chapters maintained?  
Are thumbnails maintained?  
Recording and Playing while Copying  
§6  
§7  
§6  
§8  
§1 To high speed copy titles (or playlists created from those titles), set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On” before recording to the HDD (The  
default setting is “On”. > 61).  
However in the following cases, copying to DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using the high speed mode does not work.  
When arranging multiple titles for copying, if any titles are recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “Off”, then you cannot perform with high-speed copy.  
Playlists created from titles using a variety of recording modes or multiple titles using FR recording mode.  
Playlists mixed with a variety of audio types (Dolby Digital and LPCM, etc.).  
Titles that contain many deleted segments.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in “EP” mode and “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode. (Displayed  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect  
)
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] Titles recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode  
§2 If you select a recording mode with better picture quality than the original, the picture quality does not improve. (However it does prevent  
against degradation of picture quality.)  
[+R]DL] You cannot copy in “EP” or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
§3 You cannot select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select”.  
If you want to set auto-play select or the background colour, select “Top Menu” or “Auto-Play Select” in “DVD Management” before copying (  
§4 You cannot copy playlists with a play time more than 8 hours.  
>
58).  
When you copy a playlist, it will become a title in the destination drive.  
§5 [RAM] [-R]DL] [+R]DL] [+RW] : One title becomes one chapter.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] : Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›] about 5 minutes [+R] about 8 minutes) when finalising after copying the disc.  
§6 Thumbnails return to the default position.  
§7 When copying playlists, the thumbnails may not reflect changes made to them.  
§8 Possible only with titles on the HDD  
(However it is not possible when copying with automatic finalisation.)  
– You cannot perform chasing play or edit, etc. while copying.  
– You cannot play a playlist while copying titles with “One time only recording” restriction (> 19).  
– Still pictures or music cannot be played.  
Approximate copying times (Max. speed)  
(excludes time required to write data management information)  
HDD  
5X Speed  
DVD-RAM  
12X Speed  
4X Speed  
4X Speed  
8X Speed  
+R§4  
4X Speed  
+R DL§2  
4X Speed  
+RW  
DVD-R§1  
DVD-R DL§2  
DVD-RW§3  
Recording  
Mode  
Recorded  
Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed Required Speed  
time  
time  
5 min. 46 s.  
2 min. 30 s.  
1 min. 21 s.  
58 s.  
time  
time  
time  
time  
time  
XP  
1
hour  
12 min.  
6 min.  
3 min.  
2 min.  
1 min. 30 s.  
5x  
10x  
24x  
44x  
62x  
75x  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s.  
2 min. 30 s.  
1 min. 53 s.  
4x  
8x  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s.  
2 min. 30 s.  
1 min. 57 s.  
4x  
8x  
8 min. 20 s.  
3 min. 45 s.  
1 min. 53 s.  
7x  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s.  
4x  
8x  
15 min.  
7 min. 30 s.  
3 min. 45 s.  
4x  
8x  
1
SP  
10x  
20x  
30x  
40x  
16x  
32x  
LP  
16x  
24x  
32x  
16x  
24x  
31x  
16x  
16x  
EP (6H)  
EP (8H)  
48 s.  
The above rated value indicates the fastest time and speed required for copying 1 hour title from HDD to each disc in the above list supporting  
High-Speed copying. The amount of time and speed may vary depending on the conditions such as the area on where information is written or  
unique feature on the disc.  
§1 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed DVD-R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 12X Speed DVD-R disc.  
§2 In this unit, copying with 8X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL, will be performed at the same speed as with 4X Speed discs, DVD-R DL and +R DL.  
§3 In this unit, copying with a 6X Speed DVD-RW disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 4X Speed DVD-RW disc.  
§4 In this unit, copying with a 16X Speed +R disc will be performed at the same speed as with a 8X Speed +R disc.  
Note  
When recording or playing while copying, the unit may not use the maximum recording speed.  
Depending on the condition of the disc, the unit may not copy using the maximum speed.  
Regarding copying to DVD-R DL (single-sided, Dual Layer) and +R DL  
(single-sided, Double Layer)  
Regarding copying of the broadcasts that allow “One  
time only recording”  
You can copy a recorded title to a CPRM (> 81) compatible  
DVD-RAM, however, the title is deleted from the HDD.  
Titles or playlists cannot be copied from DVD-RAM to the  
HDD.  
Titles will not be copied if they are protected (> 39).  
You cannot copy playlists created from “One time only  
recording” titles.  
Titles with recording limitations and playlists cannot be  
registered on the same copying list.  
When not copying in high speed mode, titles are temporarily copied at normal  
speed to the HDD and then copied at high speed to DVD-R DL and +R DL.  
The titles that were temporarily copied to the HDD are then deleted.  
You cannot copy to DVD-R DL and +R DL in the following cases.  
– When there is not enough free space on the HDD. (When copying to a new  
blank disc, if you intend to fill a new disc when copying to it, the equivalent  
of up to 4 hours of free space in SP mode is needed on the HDD.)  
– When the number of titles recorded to the HDD and the number of titles to  
be copied to the DVD-R DL and +R DL is greater than 499 in total.  
When playing a title recorded on both layers, video and audio may  
momentarily cut out when the unit is switching layers. (> 10)  
RQT9306  
45  
Copying titles or playlists  
Before copying  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the title you  
When copying a title with main and secondary audio  
Select the audio type for recording bilingual broadcast from  
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 62) when:  
Copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),  
+R, +R DL and +RW.  
want to copy and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
When “Audio Mode for XP Recording” is set to “LPCM” (> 62)  
and you are copying in XP mode.  
To show other pages  
Press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
Speed and recording mode when copying  
5 Press [OK].  
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] : High speed  
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : Refer to the following  
6
After you start copying DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-  
table.  
Video format), +R and +R DL discs, they become play-  
only and you can no longer record or edit.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
press [OK].  
Copy starts.  
Rec for High Speed Copy (> 61)  
Copy speed  
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “On”. §  
High speed  
Only titles recorded with “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” set to “Off”.  
Normal speed  
When making a copy of multiple titles that  
were recorded with “Rec for High Speed  
Copy” set to “On” and “Off”.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
§
In the following cases, even if “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to  
“On”, copy will perform at normal speed.  
To stop copying (> 47)  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] When the copying source was recorded in “EP”  
or “FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
When the copy destination (disc) does not have enough space.  
When the title aspect for the copying source and “Aspect for  
Recording” (> 61) do not match.  
When the title aspect for the copying source is 16:9:  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] copying source was recorded in “EP” or “FR  
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and  
functions (> 48)  
To check the properties of a title and sort COPY  
Navigator  
1 Press [3, 4] to select the title and press  
[OPTION].  
COPY Navigator  
HDD  
All Titles  
Disc Space: 4310MB  
Total Size: 0MB( 0%)  
No. Channel Date Day Time Title Name  
Total  
:
0
Note  
001  
002  
003  
004  
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30  
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15  
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00  
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05  
Titles and playlists recorded using a different encoding system  
(PAL or NTSC) from the TV system currently selected on the unit  
cannot be copied.  
Rec time  
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10  
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25  
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00  
---  
0:52(SP)  
Properties  
[-R] Video (Titles or playlists) cannot be copied to a disc with still  
pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.  
[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video  
already recorded on it.  
Page 01/01  
Sort  
OK  
Grouped Titles  
RETURN  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Properties” or “Sort”  
and press [OK].  
Preparation  
Insert a disc that you can use for copying (> 10).  
Confirm that there is enough remaining disc space.  
Properties:  
The name, recording date, channel etc. of the selected title are  
shown.  
Copy [Video (HDD to DVD)]  
Sort (All Titles screen only):  
Press [3, 4] to select the item and press [OK].  
This changes the way that titles are displayed. You can select to  
display titles by No., channel, recording date, day, recording start  
time and title name. (You cannot select this item if a title has a check  
mark.)  
DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and +R DL  
are automatically finalised (> 81). After finalising, the discs  
become play-only and you can also play them on other DVD  
equipment. However, you can no longer record or edit.  
If you close the COPY Navigator screen, the display order is  
cancelled.  
[HDD] > [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
(You cannot copy to finalised discs.)  
When copying in normal speed, recording mode will be set to FR.  
(However, if there is still not enough space after setting to FR mode,  
copy will not be performed.)  
Note  
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed recording  
compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or +RW 4X, the  
sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than normal.  
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal ( Silent )”  
in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu (> 61).  
If you register multiple titles, they are copied in order from the title  
at the top of the screen and not in the order you registered them.  
To change the order that titles are copied, create a copying list and  
then copy the contents of the list (> 47).  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and  
press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Video (HDD to  
DVD)” and press [OK].  
COPY Navigator  
HDD  
All Titles  
Disc Space: 4310MB  
Total Size: 0MB( 0%)  
No. Channel Date Day Time Title Name  
Total  
:
0
001  
002  
003  
004  
ARD 26. 9. FRI 13:30  
ZDF 27. 9. SAT 12:15  
AV2 3. 10. FRI 20:00  
ARD 3. 10. FRI 22:05  
Rec time  
0:52(SP)  
005 AV2 4. 10. SAT 16:10  
006 ZDF 10.10. FRI 9:25  
007 ARD 10.10. FRI 13:30  
008 ARD 11.10. SAT 21:00  
---  
Page 01/01  
OK  
Select  
OPTION  
RETURN  
RQT9306  
46  
When copying to a disc using high speed mode,  
Copying using the copying list–  
Advanced Copy  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] : only items indicated with “  
” or  
” can be registered.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] : only items indicated with “  
registered.  
To show other pages (> below)  
” can be  
[HDD] ,-. [RAM] [+RW]  
[-RW‹VR›] > [HDD]  
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
You can order titles and playlists as desired for copy to disc.  
5 Press [OK].  
To edit the copying list (> 48)  
See also “Before copying” (> 46).  
You cannot start copying when the value of the “Size” (> 48)  
exceeds 100% (“Destination Capacity:” is not sufficient).  
1
While stopped  
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
Copying” and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and  
When copying titles in high speed mode to high speed  
recording compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R 8X, +R 8X or  
+RW 4X, the sound of the disc rotating becomes louder than  
normal.  
press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced  
Copy” and press [OK].  
If you want copy to perform more quietly, select “Normal  
( Silent )” in “DVD Speed for High Speed Copy” in the Setup  
menu (> 61).  
Copy  
Cancel All  
Source  
HDD  
DVD  
1 Copy Direction  
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
HDD DVD  
Destination  
Copy Mode  
2
VIDEO High Speed  
press [OK] to start copying.  
[HDD] > [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &  
Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press  
[OK].  
0
Create List  
3
Select the copy direction.  
Start Copying  
OK  
RETURN  
If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]  
several times (> step 7).  
If “Copy & Finalise” is selected  
4 Set the copy direction.  
After finalising, the discs become play-only and you can also  
play them on other DVD equipment. However, you can no  
longer record or edit.  
If you are not going to change the copying direction, press  
[4] (> step 5).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
If you select “HDD”, “Destination” is automatically set to  
“DVD”, or vice versa.  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
To stop copying  
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.  
(You cannot stop while finalising)  
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
5 Set the recording mode.  
If you are not going to change the recording mode, press  
[4] (> step 6).  
When High-speed copying  
All titles that have completely copied at the point cancelled are  
copied.  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Recording Mode” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the mode and press [OK].  
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
When Normal Speed copying  
Copies until the point cancelled. However as for titles with “One  
time only recording” restriction, only titles that have completely  
copied at the point cancelled are copied to the disc. Titles that are  
cancelled before the copy is complete are not copied and remain  
on the HDD.  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] If copy is cancelled during the step while  
temporarily copying to the HDD, then nothing will be copied.  
However, if copy is cancelled during the step while copying to  
disc from the HDD, then only titles completely copied at the point  
canceled are copied.  
6 Register titles and playlists for copy.  
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any  
changes to it (> step 7).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
Copy  
Cancel All  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
( 0%)  
0MB  
Size:  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
HDD DVD  
Copy Mode  
Even if the title was not copied to the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW  
(DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW, the amount of remaining  
writable disc space becomes less.  
2
VIDEO High Speed  
Create List  
3
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
Start Copying  
OK  
To return to the previous screen  
OPTION  
RETURN  
Press [RETURN ].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
3 Press the “Red” button to select “VIDEO” or press the  
“Green” button to select “Playlists”.  
Recording and playing while copying  
You can record and play using the HDD while high speed copying.  
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)  
Still pictures and music recorded on the HDD cannot be played.  
Press [OK] to cancel the screen display.  
Create List  
HDD  
All Titles  
VIDEO Playlists  
- - -  
007  
008  
0:30(XP)  
To confirm the current progress  
Press [STATUS ].  
ARD 10.10. FRI  
- - -  
ARD 11.10. SAT  
- - -  
- - -  
Note  
Timer recordings executed while copying are recorded to the  
HDD regardless of the recording drive settings.  
(Only when high speed copying without finalising)  
Previous  
Page 02/02  
Select  
Next  
OK  
OPTION  
Previous  
Next  
RETURN  
4 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press  
[;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select  
all necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If  
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at  
a time.  
When you switch between the “VIDEO” and “Playlists” tab,  
the check mark is cancelled.  
RQT9306  
47  
Copying titles or playlists  
COPY Navigator/Copying list icons and functions  
Copying a finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and  
+R DL  
[DVD-V] > [HDD]  
COPY Navigator/Copying list indicators  
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed  
mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL, +RW  
Titles and playlists that can be copied in high speed  
mode to DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)  
(However, titles and playlists cannot be copied in  
high speed mode to +R, +R DL, +RW)  
You can copy the content of finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW  
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +R DL to the HDD and re-edit.  
While playing a disc, the content being played is copied to the HDD  
according to the set time.  
If you perform search, frame-by-frame or pause while copying, that  
portion of title is not recorded.  
When “Rec for High Speed Copy” (> 61) is set to “On” and you  
make a copy, the copy will be made using the picture size selected  
in “Aspect for Recording” (> 61) of the Setup menu.  
[+R]DL]  
is displayed, but copy cannot be  
performed.  
Title with “One time only recording” restriction  
(> 19, When recording the “One time only  
recording” broadcasts)  
Operations and on screen displays during copy are also  
recorded.  
Almost all DVD-Video on sale have been treated to prevent  
illegal copying, and cannot be copied.  
Titles deleted from the HDD by “One time only  
recording” restriction after copying. (> 19, When  
recording the “One time only recording” broadcasts)  
The following cannot be copied: Video CD, Audio CD and so on.  
Title or playlist contains still picture(s)  
Still picture(s) cannot be copied.  
Preparation  
Insert the finalised disc (> 13).  
Title or playlist recorded using a different encoding  
system from that of the TV system currently  
selected on the unit.  
Titles and playlists displaying these marks cannot  
be selected.  
(NTSC)  
(PAL)  
After performing steps 1–5 (“Format” is automatically set to “DVD-  
Video”) (> 47, Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy)  
1 Set “Copy Time”.  
Data size of each registered item  
If you are not going to change the setting (> step 2).  
Size:  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Data size recorded to the copy destination  
When copying at normal speed, the total  
data size will change according to the  
recording mode.  
Size:  
0MB (0%)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Time Setting” and press [OK].  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
Setting the unit to copy all the content on the disc  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” and press [OK].  
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
The total data size shown may be larger  
than the sum of the data sizes for each  
registered item, because of data  
management information being written to  
the copy destination, etc.  
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
Copy will continue until there is not enough available  
recording space on the HDD.  
Setting the unit to copy according to the set time  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “On” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Time” and press [OK].  
To play DVD-R, DVD-R DL,DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R and  
+R DL on other players, it is necessary to finalise them after copy.  
Copy  
To edit the copying list  
Select the item in step 6–5(> 47)  
1 Press [OPTION].  
Cancel All  
1 Copy Direction  
DVD ꢀꢁHDD  
Delete All  
2
Hour  
00 Min.  
Copy Mode  
DVD-Video XP  
2
3
Set the time a few minutes  
longer.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press  
Add  
Copy Time  
[OK].  
Delete  
Move  
Press OK to change the setting.  
Start Copying  
OK  
Delete All:  
RETURN  
Delete all items registered on the copying list.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Hour” and “Min.” and press  
[3, 4] to set the recording time.  
Add:  
6 Press [OK].  
Add new items to the copying list.  
7 Press [2] to confirm.  
Copying to the HDD continues for the set time even after the  
content being played finishes.  
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title or playlist and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary items.  
Set a few minutes longer than the source title, in order to  
include the operation time before play begins.  
You can also set the recording time with the numbered  
buttons.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
Press [OK].  
2
Delete:  
Delete the selected items.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
Move:  
Copying” and press [OK].  
Move selected items or change the order of items on the copying list.  
Press [3, 4] to select the destination and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK] to start copying.  
The disc top menu is displayed.  
Disc play automatically begins from title 1 when “Title 1” is  
selected from the “Auto-Play Select” menu when finalising  
the disc (> 58).  
To cancel all registered copying setting and lists  
After performing steps 1–3 (> 47)  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.  
When a title, still picture, etc. has been recorded or deleted at the  
copy source  
When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,  
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.  
RQT9306  
48  
3
When the top menu is displayed  
Copying SD Video from a video  
equipment  
Motion pictures encoded in the MPEG2 format, which have been  
taken by a Panasonic digital video camera with HDD etc, can be  
copied from the camera’s HDD to this unit’s HDD or DVD-RAM.  
(All the recordings on the same date become a title.)  
You cannot playback SD Video in the camera’s HDD with this unit.  
You must copy the files to the HDD or a DVD-RAM.  
You cannot playback or record while copying SD Video.  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the title  
you want to start copying, and press  
[OK].  
My favorite  
01/02  
01  
02  
Chapter  
1
Chapter  
2
03  
04  
Chapter  
3
Chapter  
4
05  
06  
While playing in order, all the titles after the selected title are  
recorded until the set time. (After the last title on the disc has  
finished playing the top menu is recorded until the set time is  
reached.)  
VIDEO§  
SD Video  
REC  
To return to the previous screen  
HDD  
Press [RETURN ].  
DVD-RAM  
To stop copying  
Press [].  
You can also press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds to stop  
copying.  
If stopped partway, copying will be up to that point.  
USB Cable  
Note  
§DVD Video Recording format  
The screen on the right is recorded at the  
beginning.  
The content is recorded as 1 title from the start of  
copy to the end.  
If play does not begin automatically or if the top  
menu does not display automatically, press  
[1] (PLAY) to start.  
Even if you copy a high quality video/audio DVD, the original  
picture and audio quality cannot be exactly replicated.  
If you want to copy a title from a finalised DVD-RW (DVD Video  
Recording format), create a copy list and then copy (> 47,  
Copying using the copying list–Advanced Copy).  
Preparation  
1
2
3
Turn on both this unit and the camera.  
Connect the camera to this unit with USB cable.  
Select the appropriate mode that makes the camera ready for  
data transfer (such as “PC CONNECT”) on the camera.  
Refer to the camera’s operating instructions for detail.  
The display below automatically appears when you connect the  
camera to this unit.  
Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )” and press [OK].  
Then go to step 7 on page 47.  
USB device  
Play Video (DivX)  
Copy Video (MPEG2)  
Play Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy All Pictures (JPEG)  
Copy Pictures (JPEG)  
Play Music (MP3&WMA)  
Copy Music (MP3&WMA)  
Update CD database on HDD  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
SD Video on the camera are automatically registered on the copy  
list.  
If there are no SD Video on the camera, “Copy Video ( MPEG2 )”  
is not displayed.  
RQT9306  
49  
Copying still pictures  
You cannot copy pictures recorded to DVD-R, DVD-R DL or CD-R/  
CD-RW.  
To register on a folder by folder basis  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Picture/Folder” and press [OK].  
Copying using the copying list  
Copy  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Cancel All  
[HDD] ,-. [RAM]  
Picture  
Picture/Folder  
1
Copy Direction  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
[HDD] > [-R]  
DVD HDD  
Copy Mode  
3 P
2
ress [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select  
all necessary items.  
1
While stopped  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy” and  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If  
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at  
a time.  
press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Advanced  
To show other pages (> below)  
Copy” and press [OK].  
6 Press [OK].  
Copy  
Cancel All  
To edit the copying list (> 51)  
7 Press [2] to confirm.  
Source  
DVD  
1 Copy Direction  
DVD HDD  
Destination  
HDD  
Copy Mode  
PICTURE High Speed  
2
7 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
0
Create List  
3
Copying” and press [OK].  
If you are not going to change the registered list, press [4]  
several times (> step 7).  
Only when copying individual still pictures.  
When specifying another folder as the copying destination,  
select “Folder”.  
4 Set the copy direction.  
If you are not going to change the copying direction, press  
[4] (> step 5).  
Folder  
New folder  
001 100__DVD  
002 101__DVD  
003 102__DVD  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Direction” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Source” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Destination” and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the drive and press [OK].  
The same drive as the copy source can be selected.  
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
---  
New folder  
---  
8 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK] to start copying.  
9
For copy to DVD-R  
5 Set the copy mode.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Copy &  
Finalise” or “Copy Only” and press  
[OK].  
If you are not going to change the recording mode, press  
[4] (> step 6).  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Mode” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Format” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “PICTURE” and press [OK].  
“Recording Mode” is automatically set to “High Speed”.  
4 Press [2] to confirm.  
To stop copying  
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
6 Register still pictures for copy.  
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any  
changes to it (> step 7).  
Note  
You can register still pictures or still picture folders.  
The sequence in which the still pictures are registered on the copy  
list may not be the same at the copy destination.  
If still pictures are already contained inside the copy destination  
folder, the new still pictures are recorded following the existing still  
pictures.  
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/  
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 12), copying will  
stop partway through.  
Still pictures and folders cannot be registered on the same list.  
Copy  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Cancel All  
Picture  
Picture/Folder  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
DVD HDD  
Copy Mode  
PICTURE High Speed  
2
Create List  
3
You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.  
[-R] Video (Titles or playlists) cannot be copied to a disc with still  
pictures (JPEG) already recorded on it.  
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
Start Copying  
[-R] Still images cannot be copied to a DVD-R disc with video  
already recorded on it.  
To register individual still pictures  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
To show other pages  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Previous” or “Next” and press [OK].  
You can also press [:, 9] to show other pages.  
3
Press [  
3
,
4
,
2
,
1] to select the still picture and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select  
all necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If  
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at  
a time.  
To show other pages (> right)  
To select another folder (> 51)  
4 Press [OK].  
To edit the copying list (> 51)  
5 Press [2] to confirm.  
RQT9306  
50  
To edit the copying list  
Select the item in step 6–4(for a still picture) or 6–6  
(for a folder) (> 50)  
1 Press [OPTION].  
Copying still pictures on the USB  
memory  
Delete All  
Add  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press  
[OK].  
Delete  
Copying all the still pictures  
[USB] > [HDD]  
Delete All:  
Delete all items registered on the copying list.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
1
While stopped  
Add:  
Insert the USB memory (> 13).  
Add new items to the copying list.  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
1
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the still picture or folder and press  
[;].  
USB device  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
Press [OK].  
Play Video ( DivX )  
Play Pictures ( JPEG )  
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )  
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )  
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )  
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )  
Update CD database on HDD  
2
Delete:  
Delete the selected items.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy All  
Pictures ( JPEG )” and press [OK].  
Copy All Pictures  
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists  
After performing steps 1–3 (> 50, Copying using the copying list)  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.  
– When a title or still picture has been recorded or deleted at the  
copy source  
Copy from  
USB  
Copy to  
HDD  
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,  
open the tray, change the copy direction, etc.  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and  
To select another folder  
press [OK].  
After performing step 6–  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
2
(
>
50, To register individual still pictures)  
Copying using the copying list  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].  
[USB] > [HDD] [RAM]  
Create List  
DVD-RAM  
Create List  
DVD-RAM  
Picture (JPEG)  
Folder  
Folder  
103__DVD  
\DCIM\100__DVD  
001 100__DVD  
002 101__DVD  
003 102__DVD  
1
While stopped  
0001  
----  
----  
0002  
----  
----  
0003  
----  
0004  
----  
004 103__DVD  
Insert the USB memory (> 13).  
---  
---  
---  
---  
The menu is automatically displayed. (> above)  
----  
----  
Page 01/01  
Picture 0012 File 0012  
Page 001/001  
Previous  
Next  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Pictures  
OK  
OK  
RETURN  
RETURN  
( JPEG )” and press [OK].  
You can also select folders with the numbered buttons.  
e.g.,  
Copy  
Cancel All  
5:  
[0] > [0] > [5]  
Source  
USB  
1 Copy Direction  
15: [0] > [1] > [5]  
115: [1] > [1] > [5]  
USB HDD  
Destination  
HDD  
Copy Mode  
PICTURE High Speed  
2
The still pictures of different folders cannot be registered on the  
same list.  
0
Create List  
3
3 Perform steps 4 – 8 on “Copying  
using the copying list” (> 50)  
To stop copying  
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.  
Note  
Copy Mode is fixed at “PICTURE High Speed”.  
The structure of folders on the USB memory may not be the same  
at the copy destination.  
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of files/  
folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 12), copying will  
stop partway through.  
You cannot copy the information about the picture rotation.  
Still pictures copied from USB memories are grouped by the  
shooting date in the HDD or DVD-RAM.  
RQT9306  
51  
Copying music to HDD  
You can store the following formats of music data in this unit’s HDD.  
Note  
While recording, no other operations can be performed. Timer  
recordings will not proceed.  
Tracks recorded on the HDD cannot be transferred to a disc or  
USB memory.  
CDs which have SCMS (Serial Copy Management System)  
restrictions cannot be recorded to the HDD.  
Music CD (CD-DA)  
When copying music CDs, this unit makes access to the internal  
Gracenote® Database to obtain title information. The album name,  
track name and artist name are assigned automatically allowing you  
find the track easily when playing back.  
MP3/WMA  
You can copy MP3 or WMA files from the USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/  
DVD-R/DVD-R DL.  
Copying music from a USB memory or  
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] [USB] (MP3/WMA) > [HDD]  
About the Gracenote® Database  
You can copy MP3 or WMA files recorded on USB memory or CD-R/  
CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL to the HDD by file or folder.  
The Gracenote® Database is a database used to search and retrieve  
CD title information.  
One folder is recorded on the HDD as one group.  
The maximum number of albums§ on HDD: 300  
The maximum number of tracks on HDD: 3000  
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)  
When a CD is inserted or recording from a CD begins, the unit will  
automatically search for and obtain information about the inserted  
CD.  
The Gracenote® Database comes pre-installed on this unit, so titles  
and artist information can be obtained. Please note however that the  
newest CD titles, etc. may not be registered yet to the internal  
database. This unit has an internal database containing information  
for approximately 350,000 album titles.  
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums§ that  
can be recorded will be reduced.  
Folders with music files (groups) copied to the HDD will be  
treated as albums.  
§
You can update the internal database (> 53).  
1
While stopped  
If there are CDs with very similar title information, then the incorrect  
title information may be obtained. If no title suggestions are found,  
then track name, album name and artist name will be blank.  
In these cases, enter the CD title information manually, after  
recording to the HDD has completed.  
Insert the USB memory or  
CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL  
(> 13).  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
e.g., [USB]  
Copying music from a CD  
USB device  
[CD] > [HDD]  
All tracks on the music CD (CD-DA) are recorded on the HDD.  
(Cannot record track-by-track.)  
Play Video ( DivX )  
Play Pictures ( JPEG )  
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )  
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )  
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )  
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )  
Update CD database on HDD  
One CD is recorded on the HDD as one album.  
Audio quality: LPCM  
The maximum number of albums on HDD: 300  
(Depends on the remaining capacity.)  
If titles or pictures are recorded, then the number of albums that  
can be recorded will be reduced.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
( MP3&WMA )” and press [OK].  
“Copy Direction” and “Copy Mode” are automatically set to  
“USB#HDD”, “DVD#HDD” or “CD#HDD” and “MUSIC High  
1 Insert a music CD.  
Speed”, respectively.  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
3 Register MP3 or WMA files for copy.  
CD  
If you are going to copy a registered list without making any  
Play Music  
Copy Music  
changes to it (> step 4).  
You can register MP3/WMA files or folders.  
MP3/WMA files and folders cannot be registered on the  
same list.  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Copy Music”  
Copy  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Cancel All  
and press [OK].  
Track  
Track/Folder  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total = 0)  
The unit starts accessing the Gracenote® Database and  
searches for the title information.  
USB HDD  
Copy Mode  
MUSIC High Speed  
2
Create List  
3
P O W E R E D B Y  
Page 01/01  
Create copy list.  
Start Copying  
OK  
OPTION  
RETURN  
To register individual MP3/WMA files  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the MP3/WMA file and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select  
all necessary items.  
If search results indicate that multiple titles were found  
Press [3, 4] to select the appropriate title and press [OK].  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Copy” and  
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If  
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at  
a time.  
press [OK].  
Recording starts.  
5 Press [OK].  
To edit the copying list (> 53)  
To stop recording  
6 Press [2] to confirm.  
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.  
If the recording is cancelled, then no tracks on the CD will be  
recorded.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
RQT9306  
52  
To register on a folder by folder basis  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create List” and press [1].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Track / Folder” and press [OK].  
To update the Gracenote® Database  
To update the database with information on CDs that were recently  
released, follow the instructions below.  
Copy  
Destination Capacity: 4343MB  
Cancel All  
Track  
Track/Folder  
1 Copy Direction  
No. Size  
Name of item  
New item (Total=0)  
Preparing the update data  
USB ꢀꢁHDD  
Copy Mode  
2
1
Visit the following website.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “New item” and press [OK].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select  
all necessary items.  
2
Download the data to your USB memory.  
USB memory 1 GB or larger is required.  
Refer to the instruction on the website for more information.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
Updating the database on this unit  
The items will be copied in the order of the copying list. If  
you want to specify the order, repeat selecting one item at  
a time.  
3
4
Turn on this unit.  
Insert the USB memory (> 13).  
The menu is automatically displayed.  
6 Press [OK].  
To edit the copying list (> below)  
7 Press [2] to confirm.  
USB device  
Play Video ( DivX )  
Play Pictures ( JPEG )  
4 Press [3, 4] to select “Start  
Copy All Pictures ( JPEG )  
Copy Pictures ( JPEG )  
Play Music ( MP3&WMA )  
Copy Music ( MP3&WMA )  
Update CD database on HDD  
Copying” and press [OK].  
For individual files only  
When specifying an existing folder as the copying  
destination  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Folder” and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the folder and press [OK].  
5
6
Press [3, 4] to select “Update CD database on HDD” and press  
[OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Update” and press [OK].  
Updating takes up to 20 minutes.  
Do not disconnect the USB memory and the AC mains lead  
while updating.  
When creating a new folder as the copying destination  
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
2 Enter the folder name (> 44, Entering text).  
Once started, you cannot cancel updating.  
A message appears when updating is finished.  
Press [OK].  
5 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
7
press [OK] to start copying.  
Note  
To stop copying  
Timer recordings do not start while updating.  
Press and hold [RETURN ] for 3 seconds.  
Updating overwrites the internal database forcibly regardless of  
whether the data in the USB memory is the latest or not. Make sure  
you download the latest version from the website.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
Some of the CD title information in the database may be deleted  
after updating the database.  
Note  
The sequence in which the MP3/WMA files are registered on the  
copy list may not be the same at the copy destination.  
If MP3/WMA files are already contained inside the copy destination  
folder, the new MP3/WMA files are recorded following the existing  
MP3/WMA files.  
No name will be assigned after copying a CD to HDD if the CD title  
information of the CD is not registered in the database. Even if the  
CD title information of that CD is added to the database by  
updating later, the information will not be assigned to the track/  
album already copied on the HDD. (The names will be still blank.)  
Depending on the situation of Panasonic or Gracenote, upgrading  
the Gracenote® Database and providing it through the Web may be  
discontinued without notice.  
To edit the copying list  
Select the item in step 3–  
Copying music from a USB memory or CD-R/CD-RW/  
5
(for a MP3/WMA file) (  
>
52,  
Delete All  
DVD-R/DVD-R DL) or 3–  
6
(for a folder) (  
>
above).  
Add  
1 Press [OPTION].  
Delete  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the operation and press  
[OK].  
Delete All:  
Delete all items registered on the copying list.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
Add:  
Add new items to the copying list.  
1
Press [3, 4] to select the MP3/WMA file or folder and press [;].  
A check mark is displayed. Repeat this step until you select all  
necessary items.  
Press [;] again to cancel.  
Press [OK].  
2
Delete:  
Delete the selected items.  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
To cancel all registered copying settings and lists  
After performing steps 1–2 (> 52, Copying music from a USB  
memory or CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-R DL)  
1
2
Press [3, 4] to select “Cancel All” and press [OK].  
Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The settings and lists may be cancelled in the following situations.  
– When a file has been recorded or deleted at the copy source  
– When steps have been taken, for instance, to turn off the unit,  
remove the USB memory, open the tray, change the copy  
direction, etc.  
Note  
If the space on the destination drive runs out or the number of  
files/folders to be copied exceeds the maximum (> 12), copying  
will stop partway through.  
RQT9306  
53  
Setting menus  
Using on-screen menus/Status message  
Audio attribute  
Signal type  
Using on-screen menus  
LPCM/ Digital/DTS/MPEG:  
k (kHz):  
b (bit):  
ch (channel):  
Sampling frequency  
Number of bits  
Number of channels  
Common procedures  
Language  
1 Press [DISPLAY].  
ENG: English  
FRA: French  
DEU: German  
ITA: Italian  
ESP: Spanish  
NLD: Dutch  
DAN: Danish  
POR: Portuguese  
RUS: Russian  
JPN: Japanese  
CHI: Chinese  
KOR: Korean  
MAL: Malay  
THA: Thai  
POL: Polish  
CES: Czech  
SLK: Slovak  
HUN: Hungarian  
FIN: Finnish  
Disc  
Digital 2/0 ch  
1
Soundtrack  
Play  
Off  
Subtitle  
Picture  
Sound  
Other  
L R  
Audio channel  
SVE: Swedish  
NOR: Norwegian  
¢:  
Others  
VIE: Vietnamese  
Menu  
Item  
Setting  
Depending on the condition of the unit (playing, stopped,  
etc.) and disc contents, there are some items that you  
cannot select or change.  
Play menu—Change the play sequence  
This function works only when the elapsed play time is displayed.  
Select the item for repeat play. Depending on the disc, the items that  
can be selected will differ.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and  
press [1].  
Repeat Play  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the item and  
All  
Chapter  
[CD] [VCD]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
press [1].  
Group  
PL (Playlist)  
Title  
MP3/WMA (except [USB])  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›]  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
[+RW] [DVD-V] [-RW‹VR›]  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the setting.  
Some items can be changed by pressing [OK].  
To clear the on-screen menus  
Press [DISPLAY].  
Track  
[CD] [VCD] and MP3/WMA (except [USB])  
Select “Off” to cancel.  
Disc menu—Setting the disc content  
Picture menu—Change the picture quality  
Soundtrack§  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
The disc’s audio attributes appear.  
[DVD-V]  
Select the audio and language (> right, Audio attribute,  
Language).  
DivX  
Select the soundtrack number.  
Soundtrack numbers are displayed even when there is only one  
audio type.  
Subtitle§  
Playback NR  
Reduces noise and picture degradation.  
Progressive§ (> 81)  
Select “On” to enable progressive output.  
Select “Off” if the picture is stretched horizontally.  
Transfer§ [When “Progressive” (> above) is set to “On”.]  
Select the method of conversion for progressive output to suit  
the type of title being played (> 81, Film and video).  
[DVD-V]  
When the output signal is PAL  
(When the tray is opened, the setting will return to “Auto”.)  
Turn the subtitle on/off and select the language (> right,  
Language).  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›] (Only  
discs that contain subtitle on/off information)  
Turn the subtitle on/off.  
Subtitle on/off information cannot be recorded using this unit.  
DivX  
Turn the subtitle on/off and select “Text” or the subtitle number.  
Text” or subtitle numbers are displayed even if there are not  
multiple subtitles.  
Angle§ [DVD-V]  
Auto:  
Video:  
Film:  
Automatically detects the film and video  
content, and appropriately converts it.  
Select when using “Auto”, and the content is  
distorted.  
Select this if the edges of the  
film content appear jagged or  
rough when “Auto” is selected.  
However, if the video content  
is distorted as shown in the  
illustration to the right, then  
select “Auto”.  
Change the number to select an angle.  
Audio channel [HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹VR›] [VCD] and DivX  
(> 28, Changing audio during play)  
Source Select (DivX)  
When the output signal is NTSC  
Auto 1  
(normal):  
Auto 2:  
Automatically detects the film and video  
content, and appropriately converts it.  
In addition to “Auto 1”, automatically detects  
film contents with different frame rates and  
appropriately converts it.  
Select when using “Auto 1” and “Auto 2”, and  
the content is distorted.  
Automatic:  
The constructing method of the DivX contents is  
automatically distinguished and output.  
Interlace:  
Select when the disc contents were recorded using interlace.  
Progressive:  
Video:  
Input NR  
Select when the disc contents were recorded using  
progressive.  
Reduces the noise while recording (Except analogue  
channels).  
PBC (Playback control > 81) [VCD]  
Automatic:  
Noise reduction only works on picture input from a video  
tape.  
On:  
Noise reduction works for input video.  
Off:  
Noise reduction is off. You can record the input signal as it is.  
Indicates whether menu play (playback control) is on or off.  
§
With some discs, you may only be able to make changes using  
the menus (> 15) on the disc.  
The display changes according to the disc content. You cannot  
change when there is no recording.  
§
Only when you have set “Progressive” to “On” in the Setup menu  
(> 63).  
RQT9306  
54  
Sound menu—Change the DVB multi audio and  
sound effect  
Status messages  
DVB Multi Audio  
[Digital channel only]  
Press [STATUS ].  
The display changes each time you press the button.  
If more than one audio channel is output, you can set the  
desired channel before recording.  
DVB Multi Audio cannot be selected during playback or  
recording.  
Depending on the broadcast, the items that can be selected  
will differ.  
Selected drive status/type of disc or USB  
memory  
HDD  
The remaining time appears here while stopped.  
REC  
PLAY  
Recording or play status/input channel  
English  
Italian  
Spanish  
German  
French  
1 DVB  
ABC  
Channel (Analogue broadcast only)  
The name of the station (Digital broadcast only).  
Original§  
L R  
§ “Original” is displayed when the original language is available  
Selected audio type  
in a broadcast.  
DVD REC  
Recording drive/Copy progress indicator  
Dialogue Enhancer  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [DVD-V]  
[-RW‹VR›] and DivX  
(Dolby Digital, 3-channel or over only, including a centre channel)  
Title number and elapsed time during play/  
Recording mode  
Available recording time and  
recording mode  
The volume of the centre channel is raised to make dialogue  
easier to hear.  
Date and time  
Other menu—Change the display position  
Position  
Remain  
18:53:50 11.10.  
13:50 XP  
T1 0:05.14 XP T2 0:00.10 XP  
1–5:  
Title number and elapsed time during recording/  
Recording mode  
The higher the setting the lower the on-screen menu moves.  
When using Pause Live TV  
The time when the picture currently displayed on the  
television was broadcasted  
Play 15:05:13  
Live 15:10:46  
Current time  
No display  
RQT9306  
55  
HDD and disc management  
[HDD] [RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
Setting the protection  
[RAM]  
Common procedures  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the drive.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)  
1
While stopped  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
Protection” and press [OK].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK].  
press [OK].  
FUNCTION MENU  
HDD  
Remain 30:00 SP  
Playback  
Recording  
Delete  
DVD  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
Playlists  
Titles  
Used  
11  
Remain 5:38 (EP)  
Flexible Rec  
DV Auto Rec  
HDD Management  
Setup  
0 : 22  
Copy  
Disc Name  
TV Guide  
Others  
Disc Protection  
Delete all titles  
On  
Drive Select  
OK  
RETURN  
SELECT  
OK  
Format Disc  
RETURN  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “HDD  
The lock symbol appears closed when the disc is write-  
protected.  
Management” or “DVD Management”  
and press [OK].  
e.g., [RAM]  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
DVD  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (EP)  
Disc Name  
Disc Protection  
Delete all titles  
Off  
Cartridge-protection  
SELECT  
For a DVD-RAM with a cartridge  
With the write-protect tab in the protect position,  
play automatically starts when inserted in the  
OK  
Format Disc  
RETURN  
When HDD has been selected, “Delete all titles” and  
“Format HDD” are displayed.  
PROTECT  
unit.  
Providing a name for a disc  
[RAM] [-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
You can provide a name for each disc.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
[RAM] Release protection (> above, Setting the protection).  
After performing steps 1–3 (> left)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Disc Name”  
and press [OK].  
(> 44, Entering text)  
The disc name is displayed in the DVD Management window.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] With a finalised disc, the name is  
displayed on the Top Menu.  
[+RW] The disc name is displayed only if you play the disc on other  
equipment after creating top menu.  
Documentary  
My favorite  
01  
01/02  
DVD  
Management  
DVD-RAM  
Titles  
Used  
11  
0 : 22  
Remain 5:38 (  
02  
Chapter  
Chapter  
1
2
Note  
[-R] Once a name is provided to a disc, it is not possible to record  
still images to that disc.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT9306  
56  
Deleting all titles and playlists—Delete  
all titles  
Deleting all the contents—Format  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] [-RW‹VR›]  
[HDD] [RAM]  
[+R] [+R]DL] (New disc only)  
Preparation  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the HDD or DVD drive.  
[RAM] Release protection (> 56, Setting the protection).  
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)  
Note  
Formatting deletes all contents (including computer data),  
and they cannot be restored. Check carefully before  
proceeding. The contents are deleted when you format a disc  
even if you have set protection.  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Delete all  
titles” and press [OK].  
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK].  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Format HDD”  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
or “Format Disc” and press [OK].  
press [OK].  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
A message appears when finished.  
press [OK].  
4 Press [OK].  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
press [OK].  
A message appears when formatting is finished.  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
Note  
Formatting normally takes a few minutes; however, it may  
take up to a maximum of 70 minutes ([RAM]).  
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while formatting.  
This can render the disc unusable.  
Note  
Once deleted, the recorded contents are lost and cannot be  
restored. Make certain before proceeding.  
Deleting all video titles will result in all playlists also being deleted.  
Still picture data (JPEG), music data or computer data cannot be  
deleted.  
4 Press [OK].  
Note  
Delete does not work if one or more titles are protected.  
When a disc has been formatted using this unit, it may not be  
possible to use it on any other equipment.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [CD] Formatting cannot be performed.  
You can format DVD-RW only as DVD-Video format on this unit.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
RQT9306  
57  
HDD and disc management  
Note  
When finalising a high-speed recording compatible disc, it may take  
longer than displayed on the confirmation screen (approximately  
four times).  
Selecting the background style—Top  
Menu  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
You can select the background that will be displayed as the DVD-  
Video top menu after finalising or creating Top Menu ([+RW]).  
After finalising  
[-R] [-R]DL] [+R] [+R]DL] The disc becomes play-only and you  
can no longer record or edit.  
[-RW‹V›] You can record and edit the disc after formatting  
(> 57) although it becomes play-only after finalising.  
When copying in high speed, chapters will be replicated.  
[-R] [-RW‹V›] [+R] Chapters are created automatically ([-R] [-RW‹V›]  
about 5-minute§ [+R] about 8-minute§), if  
the titles were directly recorded to the disc.  
the titles were copied using any mode other than the high  
speed mode.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu”  
and press [OK].  
§ This time varies greatly depending on the condition and mode  
of recording.  
There is a pause of several seconds between titles and chapters  
during play.  
2 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select the  
background and press [OK].  
Top Menu List  
Before  
finalising  
After  
finalising  
1
2
3
Recording/Editing/Entering name  
Play on other players  
Display after finalising  
01  
Thumbnail  
(Still picture)  
You cannot finalise discs recorded on other manufacturer’s  
equipment.  
If you finalise discs recorded on Panasonic equipment other than  
this unit, the background selected as “Top Menu” may not be  
displayed.  
Discs finalised on this unit may not be playable on other players  
due to the condition of the recording.  
Title Name  
You can change thumbnails displayed in the top menu. (> 39,  
Change Thumbnail)  
[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images  
recorded on them.  
Selecting whether to show the Top  
Menu first—Auto-Play Select  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW]  
You can select whether to show the top menu after finalising.  
Creating Top Menu—Create Top Menu  
[+RW]  
+RW discs contain no Top Menu data. Top Menu is a convenient  
function. We recommend you create the menu before playing a +RW  
disc on other equipment.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Auto-Play  
Select” and press [OK].  
You cannot use the Top Menu for playing on this unit.  
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> left)  
before creating top menu.  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Top Menu” or  
“Title 1” and press [OK].  
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Create Top  
Menu” and press [OK].  
Top Menu: The top menu appears first.  
Title 1:  
The disc content is played without displaying  
the top menu.  
[-R] This function cannot be used for discs with still images  
recorded on them.  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
press [OK].  
Enabling discs to be played on other  
equipment—Finalise  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] [+R] [+R]DL]  
Make selections from “Top Menu” and “Auto-Play Select” (> above)  
before finalising the disc.  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
press [OK].  
Creating Top Menu starts. You cannot cancel creating.  
Creating Top Menu can take a few minutes.  
4 Press [OK].  
Preparation  
Press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive.  
Note  
After performing steps 1–3 (> 56, Common procedures)  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Finalise” and  
press [OK].  
You can record or edit discs after creating the Top Menu. But the  
created menu is deleted when you record or edit disc. In such  
cases, create the Top Menu again by using “Create Top Menu”.  
2 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
press [OK].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
3 Press [2, 1] to select “Start” and  
press [OK].  
A message appears when finalising is finished.  
Note  
You cannot cancel finalising.  
Finalising takes up to 15 minutes.  
([-R]DL] [+R]DL] Finalising takes up to 60 minutes.)  
Do not disconnect the AC mains lead while finalising.  
This will render the disc unusable.  
4 Press [OK].  
RQT9306  
58  
Changing the unit’s settings  
You can change the unit’s settings using Setup menu.  
The settings remain intact even if you switch the unit to standby.  
3 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.  
Deleting a channel from a Favourite does not affect the channel  
itself. You can still select the channel from the “All Channels”  
category.  
Common procedures  
To change the name of a Favourite in the “Favourite”  
1
While stopped  
column  
1 Press [1]§.  
2 Press the “Red” button.  
(> 44, Entering text)  
Press [FUNCTION MENU].  
2 Press [3, 4] to select “Others” and  
§ When the station name of the “All Channels” column is highlighted  
press [OK].  
Auto-Setup Restart  
3 Press [3, 4] to select “Setup” and  
Download from TV  
press [OK].  
You can restart auto channel setting if set up (> 9) fails for some  
reason.  
Menus  
Options  
Tabs  
However, if you perform “Auto-Setup Restart”, the order of analogue  
channels will change.  
Setup  
Remote Control  
Clock  
Setting for Standby  
DivX Registration  
System Update  
Initialize  
DVD 1  
Select “Download from TV” when you connect the unit to a VIERA  
Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later) compatible TV with an HDMI cable.  
Tuning  
Disc  
Picture  
Sound  
Display  
Connection  
Others  
When the confirmation screen appears  
1 Press [2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
When the Region Selection screen appears on the television  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the region and press [OK].  
TAB  
SELECT  
RETURN  
OK  
You can also use the following method to restart Auto Setup.  
When the unit is on and stopped  
Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the  
Auto-Setup screen appears.  
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password, clock  
settings and remote control code return to the factory preset. The  
timer recording programmes are also cancelled.  
4 Press [3, 4] to select the tab and  
press [1].  
5 Press [3, 4] to select the menu and  
press [OK].  
Settings for Digital Channels  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
6 Press [3, 4] to select the option and  
press [OK].  
DVB Manual Tuning  
You can set channels manually that the DVB Auto Setup could not  
complete successfully.  
To return to the previous screen  
Press [RETURN ].  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “DVB Manual Tuning” and press [OK].  
To exit the screen  
Press [EXIT].  
DVB Manual Tuning  
Physical Channel  
Signal Quality  
Signal Strength  
[CH35]  
578,5 MHz  
10  
10  
0
0
Channel Name  
Type  
New  
No.  
Tuning  
Favourites Edit  
You can create four Favourites of channels for making viewing and  
recording easier. Editing these Favourites does not affect the  
channel setting itself.  
TV : 0  
Radio : 0  
Data : 0  
START SCAN  
OFFSET  
CH  
RETURN  
Timer recording may not work correctly if you edit the Favourite  
during timer recording standby.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel you want to set.  
3 Press [2, 1] to adjust the frequency.  
The frequency rises and falls in steps of 0.5 MHz.  
Adjust the frequency by checking the signal strength and signal  
quality displays.  
Press the “Green” button to  
Favourites Editor  
select the Favourite.  
All Channels  
2 ABC  
Favourite 1  
20 ABC HDTV  
[Refer to “Signal Condition” (> 60) for signal quality and signal  
strength.]  
4 Press [OK] to start scan.  
The set channel is displayed in the table.  
5 Press [EXIT] and press [W X CH] to check that applicable  
channels have been selected.  
Favourite Select  
Add  
Add All  
SELECT  
RETURN  
Add New DVB Channels  
You can search for newly added terrestrial digital channels to  
receive.  
To add channels to a Favourite  
1 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “All Channels” column  
and press the “Yellow” button.  
Repeat this step to add other channels.  
1
Press [  
3
,
4] to select “Add New DVB Channels” and press [OK].  
Press the “Blue” button to add all the available channels to the  
Favourite. (This function is available only when no channels  
have been added to the Favourite.)  
The unit starts searching for  
newly available terrestrial  
digital channels. This takes  
about 5 minutes.  
Add New DVB Channels  
Scan  
CH 6  
69  
2 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.  
CH  
Channel Name  
Type  
Quality  
To change the order of channels of a Favourite  
1 Press [1]§.  
A message is displayed  
when the search is finished.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column to  
move and press the “Green” button.  
“No new DVB channels found.” is displayed when no new  
channels can be found.  
3 Press [3, 4] to select the new position of the channel and press  
the “Green” button.  
2 Press [OK] to save the newly found channels.  
Repeat the steps 23 to move other channels.  
4 Press [OK] to save the Favourite.  
To delete channels on a Favourite  
1 Press [1]§.  
2 Press [3, 4] to select the channel in the “Favourite” column and  
press the “Yellow” button.  
Repeat this step to delete other channels.  
Press the “Blue” button to delete all the channels from the  
Favourite.  
RQT9306  
59  
Changing the unit’s settings  
Signal Condition  
Settings for Analogue Channels  
You can check the quality and strength of digital broadcast signals.  
Realign the aerial if you are receiving a poor signal.  
Press [OK] to show the following setting.  
Manual Tuning  
You can delete analogue channels and set the analogue channel  
details.  
When “Signal Condition” is displayed in grey and cannot be  
selected:  
1
2
Press [EXIT] to exit the screen.  
Press [W X CH] to select a digital channel. “D” appears on the  
unit’s display.  
Press [OK] to show Manual Tuning screen.  
Manual Tuning  
3
Display the Setup menu again (> 59).  
Pos Channel CH  
Pos Channel CH  
1
2
ARD  
ZDF  
N3  
4
2
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
3
4
5
5
8
10  
Press [3, 4] to select “Signal  
Condition” and press [OK].  
The quality and strength of the  
signal are shown.  
Press [W X CH] to select the  
channel.  
DVB Signal Condition  
DVB Channel  
HR3  
BR3  
[CH14] 5 BR3  
6
7
8
9
Signal Quality  
0
0
10  
10  
+
SELECT  
Signal Strength  
OK  
RETURN  
Channel  
Channel  
10  
RETURN  
Delete  
Signal Quality  
Below 2 (display red):  
The signal quality is so poor that there may be interference in the  
pictures and sound.  
2–5 (display orange):  
The signal quality is basically adequate, but brief interference in the  
pictures and sound is possible in isolated case.  
Over 5 (display green):  
To delete a programme position  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press the  
“Red” button.  
To change the tuning settings for individual programme  
position  
1 Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to select a programme position and press  
[OK].  
Optimum picture and sound quality.  
Pos  
Channel  
CH  
901  
ARD  
4
Manual  
Tuning  
Signal Strength  
The display for signal strength is grey. “0” means signal strength 0%,  
“10” means signal strength 100%.  
If the signal is too strong, the display will change from grey to red.  
Reduce the signal amplification at your aerial.  
When the signal is weak:  
Fine Tuning Auto  
Mono  
Off  
SELECT  
RETURN  
adjust the position and direction of the aerial.  
adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the  
Setup menu (> 59).  
check that the current digital broadcast channel is correctly  
broadcasting.  
RETURN : leave  
2 Press [3, 4] to select an item and press [1].  
Pos  
Programme position in the table  
(You cannot change the programme position.)  
Channel  
To enter or change the Channel of a TV  
station  
Press [3, 4, 2, 1] to enter station name  
and press [OK].  
If the station name needs a blank space,  
select the blank between “Z” and “¢”.  
CH  
To enter newly available TV stations or  
change the CH number of an already tuned  
TV station  
Press [3, 4] or the numbered buttons to  
enter the CH number of the desired TV  
station.  
Wait a few moments until the desired TV  
station has been tuned.  
After the desired TV station is tuned, press  
[OK].  
Fine Tuning  
Mono  
To obtain the best tuning condition  
Press [3, 4] to adjust the best tuning  
condition and press [OK].  
Press [1] to return to “Auto”.  
To select the type of sound to be recorded  
Press [3, 4] to select “On” if the stereo  
sound is distorted due to inferior reception  
conditions, or if you want to record the normal  
(mono) sound during a stereo or bilingual  
broadcast, and press [OK].  
RQT9306  
60  
Chapter Creation  
Set the automatic Chapter Creation method. (> 38)  
Disc  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
[Automatic]  
[Off]  
[5 minutes]  
Settings for Playback  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
No chapter start points are set.  
Rec for High Speed Copy  
Ratings  
You can copy recorded titles from the HDD to DVD-R, DVD-R  
DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW using  
high speed mode. However, screen size, etc. is restricted  
(> below).  
Set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play.  
Follow the on-screen instructions. Enter a 4-digit password with  
the numbered buttons when the password screen is shown.  
Do not forget your password.  
We recommend turning the setting “Off” if high speed copy to  
DVD-R, etc. is not necessary when recording a programme.  
This setting is effective when recording from a television  
programme or external equipment (including DV equipment), or  
when copying from a finalised DVD-Video disc.  
Setting ratings (When level 8 is selected)  
[8 No Limit]  
[1 to 7]  
All DVD-Video can be played.  
Prohibits play of DVD-Video with corresponding  
ratings recorded on them.  
[On]  
You can high-speed copy to DVD-R, etc. Press  
[2, 1] to select “Yes” and press [OK].  
The following restrictions are applied to recorded  
titles.  
– Recordings are made using the aspect ratio set  
in “Aspect for Recording” (> left).  
[0 Lock All]  
Prohibits play of all DVD-Video.  
Changing settings (When level 0 to 7 is selected)  
[Unlock Recorder]  
[Change Level]  
[Change Password]  
[Temporary Unlock]  
– Select the type of audio in advance from  
“Bilingual Audio Selection” (> 62).  
– You are no longer able to switch the audio  
when watching a programme on an input  
channel on the TV connected to this unit.  
Soundtrack  
[English]  
[Spanish]  
[German]  
[French]  
[Italian]  
[Original]  
The original language of each disc will be  
selected.  
[Off]  
[Other ¢¢¢¢]  
DVD Speed for High Speed Copy  
Select the speed of high-speed copying (When using high-speed  
copy compatible DVD-RAM 5X, DVD-R, +R 8X or +RW 4X  
discs).  
Subtitle  
[Automatic]  
If the language selected for “Soundtrack” is not  
available, subtitles of that language will  
automatically appear if available on that disc.  
[Maximum]  
[Normal ( Silent )]  
The noise generated by this unit is less  
than when “Maximum” is selected, however  
the time required for copying will double  
(approximately).  
[English]  
[German]  
[French]  
[Italian]  
[Spanish]  
[Other ¢¢¢¢]§  
Menus  
[English]  
Start Recording Time  
[German]  
[French]  
[Italian]  
This function sets the timer recording to start earlier than the TV  
Guide time.  
[Spanish]  
[1 min earlier]  
[10 min earlier]  
[3 min earlier]  
[Off]  
[5 min earlier]  
[Other ¢¢¢¢]  
[Other ¢¢¢¢]  
§
Enter a code (> 71) with the numbered buttons.  
Finish Recording Time  
When the selected language is not available on the disc, the  
default language is played. There are discs where you can only  
switch the language from the menu screen (> 15).  
This function sets the timer recording to stop later than the TV  
Guide time.  
[1 min later]  
[3 min later]  
[Off]  
[5 min later]  
[DVD-V]  
[10 min later]  
Choose the language for audio, subtitle and disc menus.  
Some discs start in a certain language despite any changes you  
make here.  
Picture  
Settings for Recording  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Comb Filter  
Select the picture sharpness when recording.  
The setting is fixed with “On” if you set “TV System” to “NTSC”  
(> 63).  
Recording time in EP mode  
Select the maximum number of hours for recording in EP mode  
(> 20, Recording modes and approximate recording times).  
[On] Pictures become clear and vivid. Normally, use this setting.  
[Off] Select it when recording noisy pictures.  
[EP ( 6Hours )]  
You can record for 6 hours on an unused  
4.7 GB disc.  
[EP ( 8Hours )]  
You can record for 8 hours on an unused  
4.7 GB disc.  
Still Mode  
Select the type of picture shown when you pause play (> 81,  
The sound quality is better when using “EP ( 6Hours )” than  
when using “EP ( 8Hours )”.  
Frames and fields).  
[Automatic]  
Aspect for Recording  
Sets the aspect ratio when recording or copying.  
[Field]  
Select if jittering occurs when “Automatic” is  
selected. (The picture is coarser.)  
[Automatic] The programme will be recorded in the original  
aspect used when recording started (including  
[Frame]  
Select if small text or fine patterns cannot be seen  
clearly when “Automatic” is selected. (The picture  
is clearer and finer.)  
when recording started at a commercial, etc.).  
[16:9]  
[4:3]  
Seamless Play  
When recording or copying to the HDD or DVD-RAM with “Rec  
for High Speed Copy” set to “Off”, programme will be recorded  
in the original aspect ratio.  
In the following cases, even when set to “Automatic” or “16:9”,  
recordings will be made or copied in 4:3.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] When the recording mode is set to “EP” or  
“FR (recordings 5 hours or longer)” mode.  
When recording or copying to a +R, +R DL and +RW.  
High-speed copy does not work for the titles recorded in 16:9 even  
if they were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”.  
Select the play mode between playlist chapter segments and  
partially deleted titles.  
[On] The chapters in playlists are played seamlessly. This does  
not work when there are several audio types included on  
the playlist and when using Quick View (PLAYa1.3).  
Additionally, the positioning of chapter segments may  
change slightly.  
[Off] The points where chapters in playlists change are played  
accurately, but the picture may freeze for a moment.  
RQT9306  
61  
Changing the unit’s settings  
Audio Mode for XP Recording  
Choose the audio type when recording or copying with XP mode.  
Sound  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
[Dolby Digital] (> 81) [LPCM] (> 81)  
The picture quality of LPCM recordings may be lower than that of  
normal XP mode recordings.  
The audio recording becomes Dolby Digital even if you selected  
LPCM when using a recording mode other than XP.  
When recording a bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in  
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> left).  
Dynamic Range Compression  
[DVD-V] (Dolby Digital only)  
Change the dynamic range for late night viewing.  
[On]  
[Off]  
Bilingual Audio Selection  
Audio Mode for DV Input  
(Analogue broadcast only)  
You can select the kind of audio when recording from the unit’s DV  
input terminal (> 22).  
Select whether to record the main or secondary audio type when:  
Recording or copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-  
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW.  
“Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”.  
Recording or copying sound in LPCM (> right, “Audio Mode for  
XP Recording”).  
[Stereo 1] Records audio (L1, R1).  
[Stereo 2] Records added audio such as narration (L2, R2)  
subsequent to original recording.  
[Mix]  
Records both Stereo 1 and Stereo 2.  
[M 1]  
[M 2]  
When recording bilingual broadcast, select the type of audio in  
advance from “Bilingual Audio Selection” (> left).  
You cannot select the audio on this unit when recording from an  
external source, such as when copying from a video cassette  
recorder (except from DV equipment connected to this unit’s DV  
input terminal). Select the audio on the other equipment.  
When recording from the unit’s DV terminal, select the type of  
audio recording from “Audio Mode for DV Input” (> right).  
Display  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
Digital Audio Output  
On-Screen Messages  
Change the settings when you have connected equipment through  
this unit’s DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal (> 67).  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Choose the approximate time until the digital channel information  
screen (> 14) disappears automatically.  
The length of time the control panel (> 37) is displayed can also  
be changed, but “Off” does not work.  
PCM Down Conversion  
[Off] (The digital channel information is not displayed.)  
Select how to output audio with a sampling frequency of 96 kHz.  
Signals are converted to 48 kHz despite the settings below if  
the signals have a sampling frequency of over 96 kHz, or the  
disc has copy protection.  
[3 sec.]  
[5 sec.]  
[7 sec.]  
[10 sec.]  
Grey Background  
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the grey  
background when tuner reception is weak.  
[On] Signals are converted to 48 kHz. (Choose when the  
connected equipment cannot process signals with a  
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)  
[On]  
[Off]  
[Off] Signals are output as 96 kHz. (Choose when the  
connected equipment can process signals with a  
sampling frequency of 96 kHz.)  
FL Display  
Changes the brightness of the unit’s display.  
This setting is fixed with “Automatic” if you set “Power Save”  
(> 64) to “On”.  
Dolby Digital§  
Select how to output the signal.  
[Bright]  
[Dim]  
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.  
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2  
channels.  
[Automatic]  
The display turns dark during play and disappears  
when the unit is turned off. While using this mode,  
the standby power consumption can be reduced.  
Not making the proper settings may result in noise.  
New Channel Message (> 14)  
[Bitstream]  
When connected to equipment with a built-in Dolby  
Digital decoder.  
When a new DVB channel is added this unit will be informed  
automatically. Then the confirmation message appears. If you  
select “Yes” on the display, Auto-Setup starts (all channel settings  
are deleted. The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.).  
[PCM]  
When connected to equipment without a built-in  
Dolby Digital decoder.  
DTS§  
[Automatic]  
Select how to output the signal.  
[Off]  
The Channel Messages are not shown.  
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the  
signal.  
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2  
channels.  
Pause Live TV Icon  
Select “Off” if you do not want to have the unit show the on-screen  
icon while using the Pause Live TV function.  
Not making the proper settings may result in noise.  
[On]  
[Off]  
[Bitstream]  
When connected to equipment with a built-in DTS  
decoder.  
Screen Saver  
[PCM]  
When connected to equipment without a built-in  
DTS decoder.  
[On] When this unit is not operated for approximately 5 minutes  
while the screen is being displayed, the screen saver is  
displayed. To return to the previous screen, press [OK].  
MPEG§  
Select how to output the signal.  
[Off]  
Select “Bitstream” if the connected equipment decodes the signal.  
Select “PCM” if this unit decodes the signal and outputs it as 2  
channels.  
FUNCTION MENU Display  
[On] When the unit is turned on, the FUNCTION MENU will be  
Not making the proper settings may result in noise.  
displayed. (> 7)  
[Bitstream]  
When connected to equipment with a built-in  
MPEG decoder.  
[Off]  
[PCM]  
When connected to equipment without a built-in  
MPEG decoder.  
§
Refer to the operating instructions for connected devices to verify  
whether or not they can decode each of the audio formats.  
RQT9306  
62  
HDMI Settings  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Connection  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
Depending on the connected equipment, some items may be  
shaded in grey on the display and cannot be selected, or you may  
not be able to change the settings.  
HDMI Video Format  
You can only select items compatible with the connected  
equipment. This setting normally does not need to be changed.  
However if you are concerned about output picture quality, it may  
be improved by changing the setting.  
TV Aspect  
Set to match the type of television connected.  
To enjoy High Quality Video up-converted to 1080p, you need  
to connect the unit directly to 1080p compatible HDTV. If this  
unit is connected to an HDTV through other equipment, it must  
also be 1080p compatible.  
[16:9]  
When connected to a 16:9 widescreen television.  
[Pan & Scan]  
When connected to a 4:3 aspect  
television, side picture is trimmed  
for 16:9 picture.  
[576i/480i] [576p/480p]  
[1080p]  
[720p]  
[1080i]  
When setting video output to “1080p”, we  
recommend using High Speed HDMI Cables that  
have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover) and  
are less than 5 meters to prevent video distortion  
etc.  
[Letterbox]  
When connected to a 4:3 aspect  
television. 16:9 picture is shown in  
the letterbox style.  
Progressive  
[Automatic] Automatically selects the output resolution best  
suited to the connected television (1080p, 1080i,  
720p, 576p/480p or 576i/480i).  
You can enjoy progressive video by connecting this unit’s  
COMPONENT VIDEO OUT terminals to an LCD/plasma television  
or LCD projector compatible with progressive scan.  
Aspect for 4:3 Video  
To play a 4:3 title when connected with an HDMI cable, set how  
to show pictures on a 16:9 widescreen television.  
This setting is fixed with “Off” if you set “AV1 Output” to “RGB 1  
( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.  
[On]  
[Off]  
[4:3]  
Picture output expands left or right.  
Note  
When connected to a regular television (CRT: Cathode ray tube)  
or a multi system television using PAL mode, even if it is  
progressive compatible, progressive output can cause some  
flickering. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned about it  
(> 54).  
Picture will not be displayed correctly if connected to an  
incompatible television.  
[16:9]  
Picture is output as original aspect with  
side panels.  
Digital Audio Output  
[HDMI and Optical]  
[Optical Only]  
Select when this unit is connected to an  
TV System  
amplifier with an optical digital audio  
cable and connected to a TV with an  
HDMI cable and you want to enjoy the  
highest quality of audio from discs  
(> 67).  
Change the setting to match the equipment you are connecting  
with, or to match the title when there are both PAL and NTSC titles  
on the HDD.  
[PAL]  
Select when connecting to a PAL or Multi-system  
television. Titles recorded using NTSC are played as  
PAL 60.  
VIERA Link  
Set to use “HDAVI Control” function when connected with an  
HDMI cable to a device that supports “HDAVI Control”.  
Select to record television programmes and PAL input  
from other equipment.  
[HDD] Select when playing a PAL input title recorded on  
the HDD.  
[On]  
[Off]  
Select when you do not want to use “HDAVI Control”.  
[NTSC] Select when connecting to a NTSC television.  
Television programmes cannot be recorded properly.  
Select to record NTSC input from other equipment.  
[HDD] Select when playing a NTSC input title recorded  
on the HDD.  
AV1 Output  
Set according to the terminal of the connected TV.  
Select “Video ( with component )” or “S Video ( with component )”  
for component output (progressive output).  
If this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, you cannot select  
“RGB 1 ( without component )” or “RGB 2 ( without component )”.  
Note  
This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have  
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes can  
be recorded onto the HDD.)  
[Video ( with component )]  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive a composite signal.  
If “NTSC” has been selected, the TV Guide system cannot be  
used.  
A title recorded on the HDD with different TV system cannot be  
played with the setting as is. A disc with different TV system may  
not be also played with the setting as is, only when recording or  
on standby for the timer recording.  
In those cases, you will be able to playback by changing the “TV  
System” settings. But to prevent the failure of the timer recording,  
change back the settings before the recording starts.  
[S Video ( with component )]  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an S Video  
signal.  
[RGB 1 ( without component )]  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If  
you always would like to view the picture from the unit in RGB  
signal, select this mode. The TV screen will automatically switch  
to display the picture from the unit when the unit is turned on.  
[RGB 2 ( without component )]  
Select when a TV is connected that can receive an RGB signal. If  
you would like to switch to display the picture from the unit only  
when playback or viewing menus, select this mode.  
To change the setting all at once (PAL!#NTSC)  
While stopped, keep pressing [] and [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the  
main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.  
AV2 Input  
Set according to the output signal of the connected equipment.  
[Video]  
[S Video]  
RQT9306  
63  
Changing the unit’s settings  
Setting for Standby  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Others  
(All factory default settings are indicated with underlined text.)  
Power Save  
Remote Control  
Change the remote control code on the main unit and the remote  
control (the two must match) if you place other Panasonic products  
close together.  
[On] Power consumption is minimized when the unit is turned  
to standby (> 80).  
[Off] This sets to Quick Start Mode.  
[DVD 1]  
Use “DVD 1”, the factory set code, under normal circumstances.  
Press [ ] to select the code (“DVD 1”, “DVD 2” or “DVD 3”)  
[DVD 2]  
[DVD 3]  
Refer to the chart for the Power Save function features (> 9)  
when the unit is turned off.  
1
3
,
4
Auto Standby  
Set the time to automatically turn the unit off.  
After the unit has finished operating, the unit will be turned off  
once the set time has passed.  
and press [OK].  
Remote Control  
Setup  
[2 hours]  
[Off]  
[4 hours]  
[6 hours]  
Press “” and “OK” together  
for more than 5 seconds on the remote  
control.  
Tuning  
Disc  
The unit will not automatically turn off.  
Picture  
DivX Registration  
To change the code on the remote control  
2 While pressing [OK], press and hold the numbered button  
([1], [2] or [3]) for more than 5 seconds.  
3 Press [OK].  
You need this registration code to purchase and play DivX Video-  
on-Demand (VOD) content (> 31).  
System Update  
In order to update this unit’s software, the TV Guide download, and  
to support system changes made by broadcasts, this unit  
periodically performs software updates.  
When the following indicator appears on the  
unit’s display  
The unit’s remote control code  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
Change the code on the remote  
control to match the main unit’s  
(> step 2).  
Update data and TV Guide download information are sent by an  
unscheduled digital broadcast. In order to receive these updates,  
you must be able to receive digital broadcasts.  
An update will take approximately 60 minutes. While the update  
is in progress, “SW-DL” appears on the unit’s display. You cannot  
operate the unit until the update is complete. Removing the AC  
mains lead while the update is in progress may damage the unit.  
TV Guide download will take approximately 60 minutes. While  
the TV Guide download is in progress, “GUIDE” appears on the  
unit’s display. The TV Guide download can be interrupted by  
switching on the unit.  
Note  
Executing “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu returns the main  
unit code to “DVD 1”. Change the remote control code to 1  
(> step 2).  
Clock  
This unit usually obtains time and date information from digital  
broadcasts and automatically corrects the time several times a  
day. However, if the time is not set correctly, use the settings listed  
in the method below.  
TV Guide Download in Standby  
[On] When you set this unit to standby mode, TV Guide data is  
downloaded automatically.  
1 Press [3, 4] to select “Off” of “Automatic” and press  
[OK].  
[Off]  
e.g., This screen appears  
Software Update in Standby  
Clock  
while receiving a digital  
Automatic  
Off  
Region Selection  
[On]  
When you set this unit to standby mode, software  
updates are downloaded automatically.  
broadcast.  
Queensland  
Time  
Date  
[Off]  
15  
:
45  
:
39  
11 . 12 . 2009  
TV Guide/Software search period  
Please set the clock.  
OK: access RETURN: leave  
CHANGE  
OK  
Selects the time to automatically perform TV Guide download  
and updates when the unit is set to standby mode. This can only  
be set when “TV Guide Download in Standby” and “Software  
Update in Standby” is set to “On”.  
RETURN  
2 Press [2, 1] to select the item you want to change.  
The items change as follows:  
If there is a programmed recording set for the time you have  
selected, the programmed recording will be given priority.  
Hour!#Minute!#Second!#Day!#Month!#Year  
^-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------J  
Reset the clock regularly to maintain accuracy.  
(Monthly accuracy +/– 15 seconds.)  
The unit will give priority to searching for TV  
Guide download and update data at midnight.  
[Automatic]  
[02:00–06:00] [06:00–10:00] [10:00–14:00]  
[14:00–18:00] [18:00–22:00] [22:00–02:00]  
3 Press [3, 4] to change the setting.  
You can also use the numbered buttons for setting.  
4 Press [OK] when you have finished the settings.  
The clock starts.  
Software Update Search Now  
Start the search for new software manually.  
A new software version is announced by a message. Do not turn  
your unit off during the update. This could result in the loss of  
data. A message shows that the update has finished.  
Note  
If a TV station transmits a time setting signal, and when  
“Automatic” in the Clock setting menu is set to “On”, the automatic  
time correction function checks the time and if necessary it is  
adjusted several times every day.  
If applicable update data is found, press [2, 1] to select “Yes”  
and press [OK].  
To change the region  
1
Press [3, 4] to set “Automatic” to “On” and press [OK] in step  
1.  
Initialize  
Press [OK] to show the following settings.  
2
Press [3, 4] to select the correct region and press [OK].  
Auto clock setting starts. This takes a few minutes.  
“Automatic clock setting completed.screen is displayed.  
Press [RETURN ] to exit the screen.  
Shipping Condition§1§2  
All the settings except for the ratings level, ratings password, and  
clock settings return to the factory preset.  
3
[Yes]  
[No]  
Default Settings§1§2  
All the settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings,  
region settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings  
password, remote control code, return to the factory presets.  
[Yes]  
[No]  
RQT9306  
§1  
The timer recording programmes are also cancelled.  
Recordings on the HDD will not be deleted.  
§2  
64  
Other Settings  
2 Test by turning on the television and  
changing channels.  
Television operation  
You can configure the remote control TV operation buttons to turn  
the television on/off, change the television input mode, select the  
television channel and change the television volume.  
Repeat the procedure until you find the code that allows  
correct operation.  
If your television brand is not listed or if the code listed for  
your television does not allow control of your television, this  
remote control is not compatible with your television.  
TV  
Í
DRIVE  
SELECT  
Í
Channel  
Select  
Note  
VOL  
CH  
Turn TV on/off  
Input select  
If your television brand has more than one code listed, select the  
AV  
one that allows correct operation.  
PAGE  
CH  
Volume  
2 3  
1
4 5 6  
8 9  
Child Lock  
The Child Lock deactivates all buttons on the unit and remote  
control. Use it to prevent other people from operating the unit.  
1 Point the remote control at the  
Press and hold [OK] and  
television  
While pressing [Í TV], enter the code  
with the numbered buttons.  
[RETURN  
simultaneously until “X  
HOLD” appears on the unit’s display.  
]
e.g.,  
01:  
[0] > [1]  
10:  
[1] > [0]  
Manufacturer and Code No.  
If you press a button while the Child Lock is on, “X HOLD” appears  
on the unit’s display and operation is impossible.  
Brand  
Panasonic  
AIWA  
Code  
01/02/03/04  
35  
Brand  
Code  
05/28  
METZ  
To cancel the Child Lock  
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] simultaneously until “X  
HOLD” disappears.  
MITSUBISHI  
MIVAR  
05/19/20/47  
AKAI  
27/30  
24  
36  
33  
BEJING  
BEKO  
33  
NEC  
05/71/72/73/ NOBLEX  
74  
BENQ  
58/59  
NOKIA  
25/26/27/  
60/61  
BP  
09  
NORDMENDE  
OLEVIA  
10  
BRANDT  
BUSH  
10/15  
05  
45  
ONWA  
30/39/70  
05  
CENTREX  
CHANGHONG  
CURTIS  
DAEWOO  
DESMET  
DUAL  
66  
ORION  
69  
PEONY  
49/69  
41/48/64  
05/06/46  
05  
05  
PHILCO  
PHILIPS  
PHONOLA  
PIONEER  
PROVIEW  
PYE  
64/65  
05  
05  
37/38  
52  
ELEMIS  
FERGUSON  
FINLUX  
FISHER  
FUJITSU  
FUNAI  
05  
10/34  
61  
05  
RADIOLA  
SABA  
05  
21  
10  
53  
SALORA  
SAMSUNG  
26  
63/67  
32/42/43/  
65/68  
GOLDSTAR  
GOODMANS  
GRADIENTE  
GRUNDIG  
05/50/51  
SANSUI  
SANYO  
SCHNEIDER  
SEG  
05  
05  
36  
09  
21/54/55/56  
05/29/30  
05/69/75/  
76/77/78  
HIKONA  
HITACHI  
52  
SELECO  
05/25  
18  
05/22/23/40/ SHARP  
41  
INNO HIT  
IRRADIO  
ITT  
05  
30  
25  
49  
SIEMENS  
SINUDYNE  
SONY  
09  
05  
08  
JINGXING  
TCL  
31/33/66/  
67/69  
JVC  
17/30/39/70  
TELEFUNKEN  
10/11/12/  
13/14  
KDS  
52  
TEVION  
52  
KOLIN  
KONKA  
LG  
45  
TEX ONDA  
THOMSON  
TOSHIBA  
52  
62  
10/15/44  
16/57  
05  
05/50/51  
07/46  
LOEWE  
WHITE  
RQT9306  
WESTINGHOUSE  
MAG  
52  
YAMAHA  
18/41  
65  
Reference  
Additional connections  
Connecting a television with S VIDEO  
terminals  
Connecting a television with  
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals  
The S VIDEO OUT terminal achieves a more vivid picture than the  
VIDEO OUT terminal. (Actual results depend on the television.)  
Connect to terminals of the same colour.  
Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for  
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).  
Television’s rear panel  
AUDIO IN  
Y
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
R
L
PB  
PR  
Television’s rear panel  
Component  
video cable  
AUDIO IN VIDEO S VIDEO  
R
L
IN  
IN  
Audio  
cable  
S Video cable  
RF  
IN  
Y
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
Audio cable  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
COMPONENT VIDEO terminals can be used for either interlace or  
progressive output (> 81) and provide a purer picture than the S  
VIDEO OUT terminal.  
Connect to terminals of the same colour.  
Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for  
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
Required setting  
This unit’s rear panel  
“Progressive” setting in the Setup menu (> 63)  
If you have a regular television (CRT: cathode ray tube)  
Progressive output may cause some flickering, even if it is  
progressive compatible. Turn off “Progressive” if you are concerned  
about it. This is the same for multi system televisions using PAL  
mode.  
CRT  
DO NOT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO OUT  
COMPONENT  
VIDEO IN  
Progressive output  
This unit  
RQT9306  
66  
Connecting an amplifier with a digital  
input terminal  
To enjoy multi-channel surround sound DVD-Video, connect an  
amplifier with Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG decoders.  
Connecting a stereo amplifier  
Connect to terminals of the same colour.  
Supplied Audio/Video cable can also be used as an alternative for  
Audio cable without connecting the video connector (yellow).  
Required setting  
“Digital Audio Output” in the Setup menu (> 62)  
When this unit is connected to an amplifier with an optical digital  
audio cable and connected to a television with an HDMI cable, you  
can enjoy the highest quality of audio from the disc by setting  
“Digital Audio Output” to “Optical Only” in the Setup menu (> 63).  
In this case audio is only output from the amplifier not the  
television.  
Amplifier’s rear panel  
AUDIO IN  
R
L
Before purchasing an optical digital audio cable (not included),  
check the terminal shape of the connected equipment.  
You cannot use DTS Digital Surround decoders not suited to DVD.  
Audio cable  
Amplifier’s rear panel  
OPTICAL IN  
Insert fully, with  
this side facing  
up.  
Optical digital audio cable  
Do not bend sharply when  
connecting.  
Y
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
This unit’s rear panel  
PR  
OPTICAL  
This unit’s rear panel  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
Connecting with an HDMI compatible television and receiver  
When connected to an HDMI compatible unit, an uncompressed digital audio and video signal is transmitted. You can enjoy high quality, digital  
video and audio with just one cord. When connecting to an HDMI-compatible HDTV (High Definition Television), the output can be switched to  
1080p, 1080i or 720p HD video.  
Video sources converted to 1920k1080 resolution, while of high quality, will exhibit somewhat lower subjective image resolution than true,  
native 1080p full-HD sources. See dealer for details.  
Please use High Speed HDMI Cables that have the HDMI logo (as shown on the cover).  
When setting video output to “1080p”, please use the HDMI cables 5.0 meters or less.  
Regarding VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM” function  
When connecting with a Panasonic TV (VIERA) or a receiver equipped with the “HDAVI Control” function, linked operations would be possible.  
[> 36, Linked operations with the TV (VIERA Link “HDAVI ControlTM”)]  
Non-HDMI-compliant cables cannot be utilised.  
It is recommended that you use Panasonic’s HDMI cable.  
Recommended part number:  
RP-CDHG10 (1.0 m), RP-CDHG15 (1.5 m), RP-CDHG20 (2.0 m), RP-CDHG30 (3.0 m), RP-CDHG50 (5.0 m), etc.  
Television’s rear panel  
Required setting  
Set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and  
Optical” (> 63).  
(The default setting is “HDMI and Optical”.)  
HDMI IN  
HDMI cable  
HDMI IN  
HDMI OUT  
Receiver’s rear panel  
HDMI cable  
RF  
IN  
Y
HDMI AV OUT  
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BIITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
Note  
If you are connecting to a TV that is only compatible with 2 channel audio output, audio with 3 channels or more will be down mixed (> 81) and  
output as 2 channels, even if connecting with an HDMI cable. (Some discs cannot be down mixed.)  
You cannot connect this unit to DVI devices that are incompatible with HDCP.  
For units compatible with HDCP (High-Bandwidth Digital Content Protection) copyright protection that are equipped with a digital DVI input  
terminal (PC monitors, etc.):  
RQT9306  
Depending on the unit, images may not display properly or at all when connecting with a DVI/HDMI switching cable. (Audio cannot be output.)  
67  
Additional connections  
Connecting a television and VCR  
Connecting to a television with 21-pin Scart terminal  
You can also connect with the AV1 terminal on this unit using the  
21-pin Scart cable.  
If your television is equipped with RGB input capability, by  
connecting with a fully wired 21-pin Scart cable you can see video  
using RGB output on this unit.  
Connect the unit directly to the television  
If you connect the unit through an AV selector or  
video cassette recorder to the television, video  
signal will be affected by copyright protection  
systems and the picture may not be shown  
correctly.  
DO NOT  
Television  
Required setting  
“AV1 Output” in the Setup menu (> 63)  
When connecting to a television with a  
built-in VCR  
VCR  
Connect to the input terminals on the television  
side if there are both television and VCR input  
terminals.  
Connecting to a VCR with 21-pin Scart terminal  
You can also connect with the AV2 terminal on this unit using the  
21-pin Scart cable.  
This unit  
Required setting  
“AV2 Input” in the Setup menu (> 63)  
Connecting an Analogue television and VCR  
Connect to terminals of the same colour.  
To household mains socket  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
To the aerial  
Analogue television’s rear panel  
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN  
R
L
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
AC mains lead  
(included)  
Other connections  
(> 8, 66)  
1
5
6
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
Aerial cable  
Cooling fan  
RF  
IN  
Y
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S-VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
Audio/Video cable  
RF coaxial cable  
3
2
4
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
RF OUT  
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
R
L
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
VCR’s rear panel  
RQT9306  
68  
Connecting a Digital television and VCR  
Connect to terminals of the same colour.  
To the aerial  
To household mains socket  
(AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz)  
Aerial cable  
Digital television’s rear panel  
AUDIO IN VIDEO IN  
Splitter  
R
L
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
4
Aerial cable  
AC mains lead  
(included)  
Connect only after all other  
connections are complete.  
1
5
6
Other connections  
(> 8, 66)  
Aerial cable  
Audio/Video cable  
(included)  
Cooling fan  
RF  
IN  
Y
PB  
AV1  
(
)
TV  
PR  
RF  
OUT  
OPTICAL  
AC IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT COMPONENT  
(PCM/BITSTREAM)  
VIDEO OUT  
AV OUT  
R-AUDIO-L  
VIDEO  
S VIDEO  
(
)
AV2 EXT  
This unit’s rear panel  
RF coaxial cable  
(included)  
Audio/Video cable  
2
3
VHF/UHF  
RF IN  
R
L
VCR’s rear panel  
VIDEO OUT  
AUDIO OUT  
RQT9306  
69  
Frequently asked questions  
Refer to the following items if you have any doubts about unit  
operations.  
Please tell me about CD-R and CD-RW  
compatibility with this unit.  
¾ This unit plays CD-R/CD-RW discs which have been recorded  
in one of the following standards: CD-DA, Video CD, DivX,  
MP3, WMA and still pictures (JPEG). (> 11, 12)  
Set up  
¾ You cannot write to a CD-R or CD-RW with this unit.  
Which aerial is suitable for receiving digital  
terrestrial broadcasts?  
¾ You can use your current aerial. However, depending on the  
area where you live, a new aerial may be necessary. Consult  
your local TV aerial installer.  
Recording  
Can I record from a commercially purchased  
video cassette or DVD?  
Can this unit receive or record High Definition  
(HD) broadcasts?  
¾ No, this unit cannot receive or record High Definition (HD)  
¾ Most commercially sold video cassettes and DVD are copy  
protected; therefore, recording is usually not possible.  
broadcasts.  
Can DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video  
format), +R, +R DL and +RW recorded on this unit  
be played on other equipment?  
¾ You can play on compatible equipment such as DVD players  
after finalising the disc on this unit. However, depending on the  
condition of the recording, the quality of the disc and  
capabilities of the DVD player, play may not be possible.  
¾ If you play a DVD-R DL, +R DL or +RW, use compatible  
equipment.  
What equipment is necessary to play multi  
channel surround sound?  
¾ You cannot playback multi-channel sound on this unit without  
other equipment. You must connect this unit with an HDMI  
cable or an optical digital cable to an amplifier with a  
built-in (Dolby Digital, DTS or MPEG) decoder. (> 67)  
Are the headphones and speakers directly  
connected to the unit?  
¾ You cannot directly connect them to the unit. Connect through  
Can a digital audio signal from this unit be  
recorded to other equipment?  
¾ You can record if using the PCM signal. When recording DVD,  
change the “Digital Audio Output” settings to the following in the  
Setup menu. (> 62)  
the amplifier etc. (> 67)  
The television has both S VIDEO IN terminal and  
COMPONENT VIDEO IN terminals. Which terminal  
should I connect with?  
¾ Connecting with the component video out terminal provides a  
more vivid picture compared to connecting with the S Video out  
terminal.  
– PCM Down Conversion: On  
– Dolby Digital/DTS/MPEG: PCM  
However, only as long as digital recording from the disc is  
permitted and the recording equipment is compatible with a  
sampling frequency of 48 kHz.  
¾ You cannot record MP3 or WMA signals.  
If you have an LCD/plasma television or LCD projector  
compatible with progressive scan, connect through the  
component video terminals for high-quality progressive video.  
If you have a CRT television or a multi system television using  
PAL mode that is compatible with progressive scan, we cannot  
recommend progressive output as some flickering can occur.  
(> 8, 66)  
(Analogue broadcast only)  
Can I switch to bilingual broadcast during  
recording?  
¾ With HDD and DVD-RAM, you can. Just press [AUDIO].  
(When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “Off”) (> 28)  
¾ With DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +RW you  
cannot. Change before recording with “Bilingual Audio  
Selection” in the Setup menu. (> 62)  
Is my television progressive output compatible?  
¾ All Panasonic televisions that have 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480  
(525)/60i · 60p input terminals are compatible. Consult the  
manufacturer if you have another brand of television.  
Can I high speed copy to a disc?  
¾ Yes, you can. (When “Rec for High Speed Copy” was set to  
“On” before recording the programme.)  
Disc  
Depending on the disc type, the maximum speed varies. (> 45)  
Can I play DVD-Video and Video CDs bought in  
another country?  
¾ You cannot play DVD-Video if their region number does not  
include “4” or “ALL”.  
Refer to the disc’s jacket for more information. (> Cover)  
Can a DVD-Video that does not have a region  
number be played?  
¾ The DVD-Video region number indicates the disc conforms to a  
standard. You cannot play discs that do not have a region  
number. You also cannot play discs that do not conform to a  
standard.  
Please tell me about disc compatibility with this  
unit.  
¾ This unit records and plays DVD-RAM, DVD-R, DVD-RW  
(DVD-Video format), +R, and +RW, and plays DVD-RW (DVD  
Video Recording format). However you cannot directly record to  
a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this unit (playback and copy are  
possible). (> 10–11)  
¾ This unit also records and plays high speed recording  
compatible DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL, +RW  
discs.  
RQT9306  
70  
TV Guide  
USB  
Is it possible to programme a recording, with a  
start and end time that are different from the TV  
Guide system?  
¾ You can manually change the start and end time of  
programmes in the Timer Recording menu. (> 23)  
If setting timer recording using the TV Guide system, the start  
recording time and finish recording time can be set to a margin  
of up to 10 minutes. (> 61, Start Recording Time, Finish  
Recording Time)  
What can or cannot be done using the USB port  
on this unit?  
¾ You can play DivX, MP3, WMA or still picture (JPEG) files on a  
USB memory. (> 30)  
¾ You can copy still pictures (JPEG) files on a USB memory to the  
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 51)  
¾ You can copy MP3 or WMA files on a USB memory to the HDD.  
(> 52)  
¾ You can connect a video equipment and copy SD Video to the  
HDD or DVD-RAM. (> 49)  
¾ Data on the HDD or a disc cannot be transferred to a USB  
memory.  
¾ Data on a USB memory cannot be edited or a USB memory  
cannot be formatted on this unit.  
Can I receive TV Guide system data via a  
connected digital satellite receiver or a Set Top  
Box?  
¾ No, only via the built-in tuner. To perform timer recordings with  
digital satellite receivers or Set Top Boxes, please use your  
unit’s manual timer programming. (> 23)  
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 11)  
Music  
How can I cancel a Timer programming?  
What will happen if I try to record the same CD  
multiple times?  
¾ Press [PROG/CHECK] and select the desired entry and then  
press [DELETE ¢]. (> 25)  
¾ New album will be made following the existing album.  
What happens when I unplug the unit from the  
household mains socket?  
¾ The TV Guide data will not be updated.  
Can I transfer the music tracks from HDD to the  
disc or USB memory?  
¾ If the unit is disconnected from the household mains socket for  
a longer period of time, the TV Guide data will be lost.  
¾ Clock setting will be erased and timer recording will not work.  
¾ No, you cannot.  
TV Channels  
Please tell me about TV reception channels.  
¾ Channel indications are different from the actual TV channels.  
Refer to the following list of TV Reception Channels.  
List of TV Reception Channels  
Tuner  
System  
Channel  
Coverage  
VHF  
0–12  
6–12  
UHF  
28–69  
27–69  
CATV  
PAL–B  
Australia  
Analogue  
Australia  
Digital  
45 MHz to  
470 MHz  
DVB–T  
Language code list Enter the code with the numbered buttons.  
Abkhazian:  
Afar:  
Afrikaans:  
Albanian:  
Amharic:  
Arabic:  
Armenian:  
Assamese:  
Aymara:  
Azerbaijani:  
Bashkir:  
6566 Catalan:  
6565 Chinese:  
6570 Corsican:  
8381 Croatian:  
6577 Czech:  
6582 Danish:  
7289 Dutch:  
6583 English:  
6589 Esperanto:  
6590 Estonian:  
6665 Faroese:  
6985 Fiji:  
6765 Gujarati:  
9072 Hausa:  
6779 Hebrew:  
7282 Hindi:  
6783 Hungarian:  
6865 Icelandic:  
7876 Indonesian:  
6978 Interlingua:  
6979 Irish:  
7185 Lingala:  
7678 Rhaeto-Romance:  
Tamil:  
8465  
7265 Lithuanian:  
7387 Macedonian:  
7273 Malagasy:  
7285 Malay:  
7383 Malayalam:  
7378 Maltese:  
7365 Maori:  
7165 Marathi:  
7384 Moldavian:  
7465 Mongolian:  
7487 Nauru:  
7578 Nepali:  
7583 Norwegian:  
7575 Oriya:  
7589 Pashto, Pushto: 8083 Spanish:  
7579 Persian:  
7585 Polish:  
7684  
8277 Tatar:  
8279 Telugu:  
8285 Thai:  
8377 Tibetan:  
8365 Tigrinya:  
8484  
8469  
8472  
6679  
8473  
8479  
8482  
8475  
8487  
8575  
8582  
8590  
8673  
8679  
6789  
8779  
8872  
7473  
8979  
9085  
7775 Romanian:  
7771 Russian:  
7783 Samoan:  
7776 Sanskrit:  
7784 Scots Gaelic: 7168 Tonga:  
7773 Serbian: 8382 Turkish:  
7782 Serbo-Croatian: 8372 Turkmen:  
6984 Italian:  
7779 Shona:  
7778 Sindhi:  
7865 Singhalese:  
7869 Slovak:  
7879 Slovenian:  
7982 Somali:  
8378 Twi:  
8368 Ukrainian:  
8373 Urdu:  
7079 Japanese:  
7074 Javanese:  
7073 Kannada:  
7082 Kashmiri:  
7089 Kazakh:  
7176 Kirghiz:  
7565 Korean:  
6869 Kurdish:  
6976 Laotian:  
7576 Latin:  
Basque:  
Bengali; Bangla:  
Finnish:  
8375 Uzbek:  
8376 Vietnamese:  
8379 Volapük:  
6983 Welsh:  
8385 Wolof:  
8387 Xhosa:  
8386 Yiddish:  
8476 Yoruba:  
8471 Zulu:  
6678 French:  
6890 Frisian:  
6672 Galician:  
6682 Georgian:  
6671 German:  
7789 Greek:  
Bhutani:  
Bihari:  
Breton:  
7065 Sundanese:  
8076 Swahili:  
8084 Swedish:  
8065 Tagalog:  
8185 Tajik:  
Bulgarian:  
Burmese:  
Byelorussian: 6669 Greenlandic:  
Cambodian: 7577 Guarani:  
7679 Portuguese:  
7665 Punjabi:  
7178 Latvian, Lettish: 7686 Quechua:  
RQT9306  
71  
Messages  
On the television  
Authorisation Error.  
You are trying to play the DivX VOD content that was purchased with a different  
registration code. You cannot play the content on this unit. (DivX) (> 31)  
Cannot finish recording completely.  
Copy-protect signal was detected.  
The programme was copy-protected.  
Disc is full, or maximum number of titles are  
The HDD or disc may be full.  
recorded. Cannot finish recording completely. The maximum number of programme has been exceeded. (> 20)  
[HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW] Create space by deleting any unnecessary titles.  
Cannot record.  
Maximum number of titles exceeded.  
[Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL there is  
no increase in disc space. Available space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW  
increases only when the last recorded title is deleted.] (> 18, 39, 57)  
Use a new disc.  
Cannot playback.  
You tried to play a title recorded using a different encoding system from that of the TV  
system currently selected on the unit.  
Alter the “TV System” setting on this unit to suit. (> 63)  
TV system is different from the setting.  
To playback, please change the TV System in  
Setup.  
Cannot play on this unit.  
You tried to play a non-compatible image. (> 12)  
No Disc  
The disc may be upside down.  
No folders.  
There is no compatible folder in this unit. (> 12)  
Not enough space in the copy destination.  
Create space by deleting any unnecessary items. (> 18, 39, 43, 57)  
Delete one or more items registered on the copy list to ensure that the “Destination  
Capacity:” is not exceeded. (> 48, 51, 53)  
This is a non-recordable disc.  
Unable to format.  
The disc may be dirty or scratched. (> 13)  
The unit cannot record on the disc you inserted. Insert a DVD-RAM or unfinalised  
DVD-R, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R or +RW. (> 10)  
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +R, +R DL or +RW. (> 57)  
You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL and +R DL disc on this unit. Record to the  
HDD and then copy to the disc.  
This disc is not formatted properly.  
Format it using DVD Management  
in FUNCTION MENU.  
Not enough space on HDD. Space of 4 hours  
( in SP mode ) is necessary.  
[-R]DL] [+R]DL] It is not possible to copy when there is not enough free space on the HDD  
or when the total number of the recorded titles on the HDD and the titles to be copied are  
greater than 499.  
Maximum number of titles is recorded on HDD.  
Please delete unwanted titles.  
Delete unwanted titles from the HDD. (> 18)  
Rental Expired.  
The DivX VOD content has zero remaining plays. You cannot play it. (DivX) (> 31)  
$
The operation is prohibited by the unit or disc.  
RQT9306  
72  
On the unit’s display  
The following messages or service numbers appear on the unit’s display when something unusual is detected during startup and use.  
DVD   
The remote control and main unit are using different codes. Change the code on the remote control.  
(“” stands for a number.)  
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated number button at the same time for more than 5  
seconds. (> 64)  
GUIDE  
TV Guide data is being downloaded. (> 64)  
HARD ERR§  
NoERAS  
If there is no change after turning the unit on and off, consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
You cannot delete items on this disc.  
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.  
NoREAD  
The disc is dirty or badly scratched. The unit cannot record, play, or edit. (> 13)  
This message may appear when the DVD lens cleaner has finished cleaning.  
Press [< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit to eject the disc. (> 5)  
NoWRIT  
You cannot write to this disc.  
The disc may be damaged. Use a new disc.  
PLEASE WAIT§  
There was a power failure or the AC plug was disconnected while the unit was on. The unit is carrying out its  
recovery process. This process restores the unit to normal operation. The unit is not broken. Wait until the  
message disappears.  
PROG FULL§  
REMOVE  
There are already 32 timer programmes. Delete unnecessary timer programmes. (> 25)  
The USB device is drawing too much power. Remove the USB device.  
SP 35:50  
LP 151h  
“SP”, “LP” and the  
numbers are examples.  
Available space on the HDD or disc.  
The example “SP 35:50” is displayed when less than 100 hours are available and the example “LP 151h” is  
displayed when over 100 hours are available.  
“SP” and “LP” are recording modes, “35:50” means “35 hours 50 minutes” and “151h” means “151 hours”.  
SW-DL  
The unit is performing a software update. (> 64)  
UNFORMAT§  
You inserted an unformatted DVD-RAM, DVD-RW, +RW, an unused +R, +R DL or DVD-RW (DVD-Video format)  
that has been recorded on other equipment.  
Format the disc to use it.  
However all the recorded contents on the disc are deleted. (> 57)  
UNSUPPORT§  
You have inserted a disc the unit cannot play or record on. (> 10–11)  
You tried to operate with a non-compatible USB memory. (> 11)  
F74  
F75  
U59  
The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to a transfer malfunction.  
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
The HDMI connection could not be authenticated due to an internal data malfunction.  
Consult the dealer where the unit was purchased.  
The unit is hot.  
The unit switches to standby for safety reasons. Wait for about 30 minutes until the message disappears.  
Select a position with good ventilation when installing the unit. Do not block the cooling fan on the rear of the unit.  
U61  
U76  
(When a disc is not inserted) Displays when a malfunction has occurred during recording, playback or copy. This  
is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not broken. Once the  
display clears you can use the unit again.  
HDMI cannot be output because this unit is connected to a model that does not support copyright protection.  
U80  
U81  
U99  
The unit fails to operate properly. Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby mode.  
Now press [Í/I] on the main unit again to turn the unit on.  
U88  
(When a disc is inserted) Displays when there was something unusual detected with the disc while recording,  
playback or copy. This is displayed when the unit is in the recovery process to return to normal operation; it is not  
broken. Once the display clears you can use the unit again. (> 74)  
H or F  
There is something unusual. (The service number displayed after H and F depends on the unit’s condition.)  
Check the unit using the troubleshooting guide. If the service number does not disappear, do the following.  
(> 74–79)  
1. Disconnect the plug from the household mains socket, wait a few seconds, then reconnect it.  
2. Press [Í/I] to turn the power on. (The unit may be fixed.)  
If the service number does not disappear despite after doing the above, request service from the dealer. Inform  
the dealer of the service number when requesting service.  
X HOLD  
The Child Lock function is activated.  
Press and hold [OK] and [RETURN ] at the same time until “X HOLD” disappears. (> 65)  
§
The message are alternately displayed.  
RQT9306  
73  
Troubleshooting guide  
Before requesting service, make the following checks. If you are in doubt about some of the check points, or if the solutions indicated in the chart  
do not solve the problem, consult your dealer for instructions.  
1 second. There will be a slight difference between the time  
The following do not indicate a problem with this unit:  
Regular disc rotating sounds.  
Poor reception due to atmospheric conditions.  
Image disturbance during search.  
displayed and the actual elapsed time (e.g., actual 1 hour  
elapsed time may display as approximately 59 minutes  
56 seconds). This does not affect the recording.  
Interruptions in reception due to periodic satellite broadcasting breaks.  
Operations are slow to respond when “Power Save” is set to “On”.  
Operations do not work due to a poor-quality disc. (Try again  
using a Panasonic disc.)  
“U88” is displayed and the disc cannot be  
ejected.  
¾ The unit is carrying out the recovery process. Do the following  
The unit freezes due to one of its safety devices being activated.  
(Press and hold [ /I] on the main unit for 10 seconds.)  
to eject the disc.  
Í
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.  
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on  
the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly  
switched to standby.  
When the unit is turned on or off, there may be an unexpected  
sound.  
2
While the unit is off, press and hold [] and [CH W] on the  
main unit at the same time for about 5 seconds. Remove the  
disc.  
Power  
No power.  
The unit does not turn on pressing [Í].  
¾ Insert the AC mains lead securely into a known active  
TV screen and video  
household mains socket. (> 8, 68, 69)  
Television reception worsens after connecting  
the unit.  
¾ This can occur because the signals are being divided between  
the unit and other equipment. It can be solved by using a signal  
booster, available from audio-visual suppliers. If it is not solved  
by using a signal booster, consult the dealer.  
The unit switches to standby mode.  
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices is activated. Press [Í/I] on the  
main unit to turn the unit on.  
The power is turned off automatically.  
¾ If you connected this unit to a “HDAVI Control” compatible TV  
with an HDMI cable, this unit will be automatically set to  
standby mode when the TV is set to standby mode. (> 36)  
The digital channel information or control panel  
does not appear.  
¾ Select the length of time (3–10 sec.) in the “On-Screen  
Messages” in the Setup menu. (> 62)  
¾ The digital channel information will not appear during playback  
or recording.  
¾ Analogue broadcasts do not support the digital channel  
information.  
¾ The control panel is only displayed when connected to a TV  
supporting “HDAVI Control 2” or later. (> 37)  
This unit turns off when the TV input is switched.  
¾ If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)  
with the “Intelligent Auto Standby” setting activated on the TV,  
when switching the TV input, the unit will be automatically  
turned to standby. For details please read the operating  
instructions of the TV.  
Teletext and teletext closed caption are not  
displayed on the TV screen.  
¾ This unit does not support teletext and teletext closed caption.  
Displays  
The display is dim.  
¾ Change “FL Display” in the Setup menu. (> 62)  
The grey background does not appear.  
¾ Select “On” in “Grey Background” in the Setup menu. (> 62)  
“0:00” is flashing on the unit’s display.  
¾ Set the clock. (> 64)  
Screen size is wrong.  
¾ Use the television to change the aspect. If your television does  
not have that function, set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to  
“Off”. (> 54)  
¾ Check the settings for “TV Aspect” in the Setup menu. (> 63)  
¾ If you connect an HDMI cable, set “Aspect for 4:3 Video” to  
“16:9” in the Setup menu. (> 63)  
The time recorded on the disc and the available  
time shown do not add up.  
The displayed time of this unit is different from  
the actual recording time or MP3/WMA recording  
time.  
The recorded title’s screen size is wrong.  
¾ Set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the “Aspect for  
Recording” to “4:3”. (> 61)  
¾ 16:9 aspect programmes are recorded in 4:3 aspect in the  
following cases.  
¾ Times shown may disagree with actual times.  
¾ Available recording space on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) or  
+RW increases only when the last recorded title is deleted. It  
does not increase if other titles are deleted.  
¾ Even if you delete recorded content from the DVD-R, DVD-R  
DL, +R or +R DL, there is no increase in disc space.  
¾ More disc space than the actual recording time is used after  
recording or editing the DVD-R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL 200  
times or more.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If you recorded or copied using “EP” or “FR  
(recordings 5 hours or longer)” recording mode.  
– If you recorded or copied to a +R, +R DL or +RW.  
– If you recorded with the “Aspect for Recording” set to “4:3” in  
the Setup menu.  
¾ While searching, the elapsed time may not display correctly.  
When you want to record 16:9 programme in the same  
aspect, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to “On”, and set the  
“Aspect for Recording” to “16:9”. (> 61)  
The clock is not correct.  
By setting “Aspect for Recording” to “Automatic”, there is a  
chance that the recording will be made using the wrong  
aspect. Match the aspect settings to the broadcast when  
recording. (> 61)  
It may be possible to adjust the display mode on the TV. Refer to  
your television’s operating instructions.  
¾ Under adverse reception conditions, etc., the automatic time  
correction function may not work. In this case, “Automatic” is  
automatically turned to “Off”. If re-setting the Auto Clock Setting  
does not work, set the time manually. (> 64)  
Compared to the actual recorded time, the  
elapsed time displayed is less.  
(Only when recording in NTSC)  
RQT9306  
¾ The displayed recording/play time is converted from the  
74  
number of frames at 29.97 frames (equal to 0.999 seconds) to  
¾ Depending on the connected equipment, the sound may be  
distorted if this unit is connected with an HDMI cable.  
¾ If recording to the HDD or a DVD-RAM when “Rec for High  
Speed Copy” is set to “On”, you can only record either the main  
or secondary audio of a bilingual broadcast.  
Picture does not appear during timer recording.  
¾ Timer recordings work regardless whether the unit is on or off.  
To confirm the timer recording is going to work properly, turn the  
unit on.  
If you do not intend to copy the title to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL or +RW set “Rec for  
High Speed Copy” in the Setup menu to “Off”. (> 61)  
The screen changes automatically.  
¾ When “Screen Saver” in the Setup menu is set to “On”, the  
display may turn to the screen saver mode automatically if  
there is no operation for 5 minutes or more. (> 62) Press [OK]  
to return to the previous screen.  
Cannot switch audio.  
¾ You cannot switch the audio in the following cases.  
– When a DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),  
+R, +R DL or +RW disc is in the disc tray while DVD drive is  
selected.  
There is a lot of after-image when playing video.  
¾ Set “Playback NR” in the Picture menu to “Off”. (> 54)  
– When the recording mode is XP and “Audio Mode for XP  
Recording” is set to “LPCM”. (> 62)  
– When “Rec for High Speed Copy” is set to “On”. (The default  
setting is “On”). (> 61)  
¾ The amplifier is connected using an optical digital cable or an  
HDMI cable. You cannot switch the audio if “Dolby Digital” is set  
to “Bitstream”. Set “Dolby Digital” to “PCM” or connect using  
audio cables. (> 62, 67)  
When playing DVD-Video using progressive  
output, one part of the picture momentarily  
appears to be doubled up.  
¾ Set “Progressive” in the Picture menu to “Off”. This problem is  
caused by the editing method or material used on DVD-Video,  
but should be corrected if you use interlace output. (> 54)  
¾ There are discs for which audio cannot be changed because of  
how the disc was created.  
There is no apparent change in picture quality  
when adjusted with the Picture menu in the on-  
screen menus.  
Operation  
¾ The effect is less perceivable with some types of video.  
Cannot operate the television.  
The remote control doesn’t work.  
¾ Change the manufacturer code. Some televisions cannot be  
operated even if you change the code. (> 65)  
¾ The remote control and main unit are using different codes.  
Change the code on the remote control. (> 64)  
The images from this unit do not appear on the  
television.  
Picture is distorted.  
¾ Make sure that the television is connected to the VIDEO OUT  
terminal, S VIDEO OUT terminal, COMPONENT VIDEO OUT  
terminals or HDMI terminal on this unit. (> 8, 66, 67, 68, 69)  
¾ Make sure that the television’s input setting is correct.  
¾ Progressive output is set to on but the connected television is  
not progressive compatible. Press and hold [] and [1] (PLAY)  
on the main unit at the same time for more than 5 seconds to  
cancel this setting. The setting will change to interlace.  
¾ The unit’s “TV System” setting differs from the TV system used  
by the disc now playing. While stopped, keep pressing [] and  
[< OPEN/CLOSE] on the main unit for 5 or more seconds. The  
system switches from PAL to NTSC or vice versa. (> 63)  
¾ When this unit is connected with an HDMI cable, use a disc that  
matches with this unit’s TV system.  
Press and hold [OK] and the indicated  
number button at the same time for  
more than 5 seconds.  
¾ The batteries are depleted. Replace them with new ones. (> 4)  
¾ You are not pointing the remote control at the main unit’s  
remote control signal sensor during operation. (> 4)  
¾ Coloured glass may obstruct the signal reception/transmission.  
¾ Don’t place the signal sensor in direct sunlight or in areas that  
may be subject to sunlight exposure.  
¾ It may be necessary to set the code on the remote control again  
after changing the batteries. (> 64)  
¾ It may be necessary to set the manufacturer code again after  
changing the batteries. (> 65)  
¾ The child lock function is activated. (> 65)  
¾ Picture may not be seen when more than 4 devices are  
connected with HDMI cables.  
Reduce the number of connected devices.  
The unit is on but cannot be operated.  
¾ Recording drive or playback drive has not been selected  
properly. (> 15, 16)  
¾ Some operations may be prohibited by the disc.  
¾ The unit is hot (“U59” appears on the display). Wait for “U59” to  
disappear.  
The picture is distorted during play, or video will  
not play correctly.  
¾ You may be playing a TV programme recorded with poor  
reception or unfavourable weather conditions.  
¾ The picture may be distorted or a black screen may appear  
briefly between recorded titles in the following situations:  
– between titles recorded with different recording modes.  
– between scenes recorded with different aspect ratios.  
– between scenes recorded with different resolutions.  
– between playlist chapters.  
¾ One of the unit’s safety devices may have been activated.  
Reset the unit as follows:  
1
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch the unit to standby.  
If the unit doesn’t switch to standby, press and hold [Í/I] on  
the main unit for about 10 seconds. The unit is forcibly  
switched to standby.  
Alternatively, disconnect the AC mains lead, wait one  
minute, then reconnect it.  
2
Press [Í/I] on the main unit to switch it on. If the unit still  
cannot be operated, consult the dealer.  
Sound  
No sound.  
Low volume.  
Cannot eject disc.  
¾ The unit is recording.  
¾ The unit may have a problem. While the unit is off, press and  
hold [] and [CH W] on the main unit at the same time for about  
5 seconds. Remove the disc and consult the dealer.  
If the Child Lock function is activated, above operation does not  
work. Cancel the Child Lock function. (> 65)  
Distorted sound.  
Cannot hear the desired audio type.  
¾ Check the connections and the “Digital Audio Output” settings.  
Check the input mode on the amplifier if you have connected  
one. (> 8, 62, 63, 66, 67, 68, 69)  
¾ Press [AUDIO] to select the audio. (> 28)  
¾ Audio may not be output due to how files were created. (DivX)  
¾ Audio may not be heard when more than 4 devices are  
connected with HDMI cables.  
Reduce the number of connected devices.  
¾ The sound effects will not work when the bitstream signal is  
output from the HDMI AV OUT terminal or the OPTICAL  
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT terminal.  
¾ To output audio from a device connected with an HDMI cable,  
set “Digital Audio Output” to “HDMI and Optical” in the Setup  
menu. (> 63)  
RQT9306  
75  
Troubleshooting guide  
Cannot tune channels.  
Cannot download channel presets from the  
television.  
Timer recording does not stop even when [] is  
pressed.  
¾ Check the connections. (> 8, 68, 69)  
¾ You must connect to a VIERA Link (HDAVI Control 3 or later)  
compatible TV with a HDMI cable to download channel presets.  
¾ If you start recording immediately after turning on the unit while  
“Power Save” is set to “Off” in the Setup menu (Quick Start  
mode), you cannot then stop recording for a few seconds.  
Startup is slow.  
The timer programme remains even after  
recording finishes.  
¾ The timer programme remains if set to daily or weekly.  
¾ Set “Power Save” to “Off” in the Setup menu. (> 64)  
If connected with an HDAVI Control 4 compatible TV (VIERA)  
with the “Standby Power Save” setting activated on the TV,  
even with “Power Save” set to “Off”, when the TV is in Standby  
mode, the unit may take some time to startup.  
¾ Startup takes time in the following situations:  
– A disc other than a DVD-RAM is inserted.  
– The clock is not set.  
A part or whole of a recorded title has been lost.  
¾ If there is a power failure or the plug is disconnected from the  
household mains socket while recording or editing, the title may  
be lost or the HDD/disc may become unusable.  
– Immediately after a power failure or the AC mains lead is  
connected.  
– When the unit is connected with an HDMI cable.  
You will have to format the disc ([HDD] [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+RW]) or  
use a new disc. We cannot offer any guarantee regarding lost  
programmes or discs. (> 57)  
Recording, timer recording and  
copying  
The programme name and the recorded title do  
not match.  
¾ There was a programme change after timer recording was set  
but the recorded title still has the old programme name.  
Cannot record.  
Cannot copy.  
¾ You haven’t inserted a disc or the disc you inserted cannot be  
recorded on. Insert a disc the unit can record onto. (> 10)  
¾ The disc is unformatted. Format the disc. [RAM] [-RW‹V›] [+R]  
[+R]DL] [+RW] (> 57)  
¾ The write-protect tab on the cartridge is set to PROTECT, or the  
disc is protected with DVD Management. (> 56)  
¾ Some programmes have limitations on the number of times  
they can be recorded (CPRM). (> 81)  
¾ You cannot record when there is not enough space or when the  
number of titles has reached its limit. Delete unwanted titles or  
use a new disc. (> 18, 39, 57)  
¾ You cannot directly record to a DVD-R DL or +R DL disc on this  
unit.  
Cannot copy to a DVD-R, etc. disc using the high  
speed mode.  
¾ When recording to the HDD, set “Rec for High Speed Copy” to  
“On” in the Setup menu. (The default setting is “On”). (> 61)  
¾ In the following cases, high speed mode does not work, even if  
the titles were recorded with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to  
“On”.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in “EP” or “FR (recordings  
5 hours or longer)” mode.  
[+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] If recorded in 16:9 aspect.  
[-R] [-R]DL] [-RW‹V›] If recorded in 16:9 aspect using “EP” mode  
or “FR” (recordings 5 hours or longer) mode.  
¾ [+R] [+R]DL] [+RW] Titles recorded on other Panasonic DVD  
recorders with “Rec for High Speed Copy” set to “On”, and then  
copied to the HDD on this unit may not copy to +R, +R DL or  
+RW discs with high-speed copy.  
Record to the HDD and then copy to the disc.  
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] In the following situations, you cannot copy.  
Delete unnecessary titles from the HDD and then copy. (> 18,  
39, 57)  
– If there is not enough space available on the HDD (If you will  
copy titles from the HDD to a blank disc and fill the entire  
disc, HDD disc space equivalent to 4 hours of SP mode  
recording is necessary).  
When copying, it takes a long time even when  
high speed mode is selected.  
– If the number of recorded titles and the number of titles to be  
copied has exceeded 499.  
¾ Use a disc that is compatible with high speed recording. Even if  
the disc is high speed recording compatible, the maximum  
speed may not be possible due to the condition of the disc.  
¾ It takes longer than normal to copy many titles.  
¾ You cannot high speed copy to DVD-R titles longer than 6 hours  
when using other Panasonic DVD Recorders that are not  
compatible with EP ( 8Hours ) mode recording.  
¾ You cannot record and copy on finalised discs. However, you  
can record and copy again if you format DVD-RW.  
¾ Due to peculiarities of DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-  
Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW you may be unable to  
record onto them if you either insert and remove the disc or  
switch the unit on and off while a disc is loaded, a total of fifty  
times.  
¾ DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL  
and +RW recorded on this unit may not be recordable on other  
Panasonic DVD Recorders.  
¾ This unit cannot record NTSC signals to discs that already have  
PAL signal recordings. (However, both types of programmes  
can be recorded onto the HDD.) Play of discs recorded with  
both PAL and NTSC on another unit is not guaranteed.  
¾ Some broadcasts are copyright protected.  
An unusually loud sound is coming from the  
rotating DVD-R, etc.  
¾ When recording or high speed copying to a DVD-R, DVD-R DL,  
DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R DL and +RW the sound  
of the disc rotating may be louder than normal, however, this is  
not a problem.  
The DV automatic recording function does not  
work.  
Cannot record from external equipment.  
¾ If images cannot be recorded or if the recording is aborted,  
check the connections and DV equipment settings. (> 22)  
¾ You cannot start recording until the images from the DV  
equipment appear on the television.  
¾ Check that the connection is correct. (> 22, 68, 69)  
¾ Select the input channel for the equipment you have connected.  
¾ Recording may not be performed as desired if the time codes  
on the tape in the DV equipment are not successive.  
¾ Depending on the equipment, the DV automatic recording may  
not operate properly.  
¾ The audio/video recordings are recorded on other than a DV  
tape. (> 22)  
Timer recording does not work properly.  
¾ The timer programme is incorrect or different timer programme  
times overlap. Correct the programme. (> 25)  
¾ The programme is not in timer recording standby. (The timer  
icon “F” in the timer recording list is not on.) (> 24)  
¾ Set the clock. (> 64)  
¾ The programme information in the TV Guide system may not be  
correct. It is recommended to modify the start and end times to  
allow a margin of a few minutes. (> 23)  
RQT9306  
76  
Play  
The Video CD picture does not display properly.  
¾ When connecting to Multi-system TV, select “NTSC” in “TV  
System” in the Setup menu. (> 63)  
¾ When connecting to PAL TV, the lower part of the picture  
cannot be displayed correctly during search.  
Play fails to start even when [1] (PLAY) is  
pressed.  
Play starts but then stops immediately.  
¾ Insert the disc correctly with the label facing up. (> 13)  
¾ The disc is dirty. (> 13)  
¾ You tried to play a blank disc or disc unplayable on this unit.  
(> 10–11)  
¾ You tried to play a +RW that needs to be finalised on the  
equipment used for recording.  
Time Slip, Manual Skip, etc. does not work.  
¾ These functions do not work with finalised discs.  
¾ Time Slip does not work when the unit’s “TV System” settings  
are different from the title recorded on the disc. (> 63)  
¾ You may be able to copy a “One time only recording” title that  
was recorded to DVD-RAM using a different Panasonic DVD  
Recorder to this unit’s HDD, but play is not possible due to  
copyright protection.  
It takes time before play starts.  
¾ This is normal on DivX video. (DivX)  
¾ When recording to DVD-RAM using “EP ( 8Hours )” mode, play  
may not be possible on DVD players that are compatible with  
DVD-RAM. In this case use “EP ( 6Hours )” mode. (> 61)  
¾ You cannot play discs during DV automatic recording.  
¾ If playing DivX VOD content, refer to the homepage where you  
purchased it. (DivX) (> 31)  
Picture stops.  
¾ Picture may stop if the DivX files are greater than 2 GB. (DivX)  
¾ Make sure that the TV is turned on. If the menu or messages  
are displayed, follow the on-screen instructions.  
Cannot see the beginning of the title played.  
¾ (If connecting to a TV that supports VIERA Link with an HDMI  
cable)  
When [1] (PLAY) is pressed on this unit’s remote control, you  
may not be able to see the beginning of the title played until the  
picture is displayed on the TV. Using [:], return to the  
beginning of the title.  
Audio and video momentarily pause.  
¾ This occurs between playlist chapters.  
¾ This occurs between chapters and with partially deleted titles  
on finalised DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format),  
+R, +R DL and +RW that have been copied using the high  
speed mode.  
¾ This occurs as scenes change during Quick View.  
¾ [-R]DL] [+R]DL] When playing a title recorded on both layers, the  
unit automatically switches between layers and plays the title in  
the same way as a normal programme. However, video and  
audio may momentarily cut out when the unit is switching  
layers. (> 10)  
Edit  
Available disc space does not increase even after  
deleting a title.  
¾ Available disc space does not increase after deleting on DVD-  
R, DVD-R DL, +R or +R DL. (> 18)  
¾ Disc space increases only when the last recorded title is  
deleted on DVD-RW (DVD-Video format) and +RW. The disc  
space does not increase when any other titles are deleted.  
DVD-Video is not played.  
¾ You have set a ratings level to limit DVD-Video play. Change  
this setting. (> 61)  
¾ Ensure disc is for the correct DVD-Video region number, and is  
not defective. (> Cover)  
Cannot edit.  
¾ You may not be able to edit on the HDD if there is no available  
space.  
Alternative soundtrack and subtitles cannot be  
selected.  
Delete any unwanted titles to create empty space. (> 18)  
¾ The languages are not recorded on the disc.  
¾ You may not be able to use the on-screen menus to change the  
soundtrack and subtitles on some discs. Use the disc’s menus  
to make changes. (> 15)  
Cannot format.  
¾ The disc is dirty. Wipe with a damp cloth and then wipe dry.  
(> 13)  
¾ You tried formatting a disc that you may not be able to use in  
this unit. (> 10–11)  
No subtitles.  
¾ Subtitles are not recorded on the disc.  
¾ Turn the subtitles on and select “Text” or the subtitle number.  
(> 54)  
Cannot create chapters.  
Cannot mark the start point or the end point  
during “Partial Delete” operation.  
¾ The unit writes the chapter division information to the disc when  
you turn it off or remove the disc. The information is not written  
if there is an interruption to the power before this.  
¾ These operations are not possible with still pictures.  
¾ You cannot set points if they are too close to each other. You  
cannot set an end point before a start point.  
Angle cannot be changed.  
¾ Angles can only be changed during scenes where different  
angles are recorded.  
You have forgotten your ratings password.  
You want to cancel the ratings level.  
¾ The ratings level returns to the factory preset. While the disc  
tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select the DVD drive,  
then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on the main unit  
at the same time for 5 or more seconds (“INIT” will appear on  
the unit’s display).  
Cannot delete chapters.  
¾ When the chapter is too short to delete, use “Combine  
Chapters” to make the chapter longer. (> 39)  
Cannot create a playlist.  
¾ You cannot select all the chapters at once in a title if the title  
Quick View does not work.  
also includes still pictures. Select them individually.  
¾ This does not work when audio is other than Dolby Digital.  
¾ This does not work when recording is in XP or FR mode.  
The resume play function does not work.  
¾ Memorized positions are cancelled when  
– press [] several times.  
– open the disc tray.  
[CD] [VCD] [USB] turn off the unit.  
– if a recording or timer recording was executed.  
RQT9306  
77  
Troubleshooting guide  
Music  
TV Guide  
Tracks could not be copied to the HDD.  
The TV Guide System does not receive any data.  
¾ If there are copyright protected tracks such as SCMS  
restrictions, they will not be copied.  
¾ Recording from CDs that do not conform to CD-DA  
specifications (copy control CDs, etc.) cannot be guaranteed.  
¾ Bonus tracks may not be copied.  
¾ Check whether the clock is properly set. (> 64)  
¾ If signal quality is bad (ghost images or limited reception), the  
TV Guide system may not be able to receive any data.  
“No Data” is displayed for some or all stations.  
¾ Some stations are not supported by the TV Guide system.  
¾ Analogue broadcasts are not supported by the TV Guide  
ID3 tag of a MP3 file or WMA tag of a WMA file is  
not completely displayed.  
¾ Only the track name ([HDD] [USB]) and artist name ([HDD]) can  
system.  
¾ Programme the Timer recording manually or via G-CODE.  
be displayed with this unit.  
(> 23)  
The TV Guide information is not displayed  
properly.  
Still pictures  
¾ There was a programme change.  
Cannot display DIRECT NAVIGATOR screen.  
¾ This screen cannot be displayed during recording or copying.  
Check the current programme, e.g. on the Web site for the TV  
Guide system provider or station provider.  
¾ Programme information about analogue broadcasts is not  
displayed.  
Still pictures (JPEG) do not playback normally.  
¾ The images that were edited on the PC, such as Progressive  
The TV Guide data transfer was interrupted.  
JPEG etc., may not playback. (> 12)  
¾ The TV Guide system shows the data that was received up to  
the interruption.  
¾ The programme information may be incomplete.  
USB  
The TV Guide data is not updated.  
¾ Make sure that the time is set correctly.  
¾ Check whether “Off” is set under “TV Guide Download in  
Standby” and change the setting in the Setup menu. (> 64)  
The contents of the USB memory cannot be read.  
¾ Remove the USB memory from the USB port and then insert  
again. If this does not solve the problem, turn off and turn on the  
unit again.  
¾ Check that the USB memory is inserted correctly. (> 13)  
¾ The format of the USB memory or of its contents is not  
compatible with the unit. (The contents on the USB memory  
may be damaged.) (> 11, 12)  
¾ The USB memory contains a folder structure and/or file  
extensions that are not compatible with this unit. (> 12)  
¾ Turn off and then turn on the unit again.  
¾ USB memories connected using a USB extension cable or a  
USB hub may not be recognized by this unit.  
¾ Some USB memories cannot be used with this unit. (> 11)  
¾ If inserted during playback, recording or copying etc., the USB  
memory may not be recognized by this unit.  
RQT9306  
78  
The operation on this unit (music playback etc.)  
is interrupted.  
¾ The operation on this unit may be interrupted when you press  
buttons on the TV remote control that do not work for VIERA  
Link functions.  
Digital broadcast  
Digital broadcasts cannot be received.  
¾ Digital broadcast may not have started in your region yet.  
¾ The aerial may not be pointing in the direction of the TV station,  
or the direction of the aerial may have changed due to strong  
winds or vibration. If problem persists consult your local TV  
aerial installer.  
To reset this unit  
To return all the settings other than the main ones  
to the factory preset  
¾ Select “Yes” in “Shipping Condition” in the Setup menu. All the  
settings except for the ratings level, ratings password and clock  
settings return to the factory preset. The timer recording  
programmes are also cancelled. (> 64)  
¾ Select “Yes” in “Default Settings” in the Setup menu. All the  
settings other than the tuning settings, clock settings, region  
settings, disc language settings, ratings level, ratings password,  
remote control code, return to the factory presets. The timer  
recording programmes are also cancelled. (> 64)  
¾ Press and hold [X CH] and [CH W] on the main unit until the  
Auto-Setup screen appears. All the settings except for the  
ratings level, ratings password, clock settings and remote  
control code return to the factory preset. The timer recording  
programmes are also cancelled.  
After DVB Auto Setup only some or no DVB  
channels are found.  
¾ Check to ensure your area is covered by DVB transmissions.  
¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.  
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/  
installed by a licenced installer that should comply with  
Australian Standard AS1417.1.  
If you live within 5-10 km of DVB transmission towers, a  
combined VHF/UHF aerial should be adequate. Outside this  
area, separate VHF and UHF aerials provide superior reception  
performance. (> 8)  
¾ If you live in a unit or apartment, check to ensure the Master  
Antenna TV (MATV) system is designed for analogue and DVB-  
T reception. Please consult your body corporate.  
To reset the ratings level settings  
¾ While the disc tray is open, press [DRIVE SELECT] to select  
the DVD drive, then press and hold [¥ REC] and [1] (PLAY) on  
the main unit at the same time for 5 or more seconds.  
Picture regularly breaks up on some channels.  
“No Signal” message is displayed.  
¾ Check “Signal Condition”. If “Signal Quality” or “Signal Strength”  
are displayed in red or constantly changing, check aerial. If  
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer. (> 60)  
¾ Check that the aerial and antenna cable are designed for DVB.  
For your safety, the aerial and cable should be inspected/  
installed by a licenced installer that should comply with  
Australian Standard AS1417.1. (> 8)  
¾ Interference (known as impulse noise) from household  
appliances such as light switches, fridges etc. may cause  
picture break up and/or audio distortion. Use a high quality  
quad shielded coaxial cable fly lead between this unit and  
antenna wall socket to minimise impulse noise pickup. If  
problem persists consult your local TV aerial installer.  
¾ Check aerial connection.  
To restore the unit if it freezes due to one of the  
safety devices being activated  
¾ Press and hold [Í/I] on the main unit for 10 seconds. (The  
settings remain.)  
Other  
After performing an update, you can no longer  
receive broadcasts.  
¾ Depending on the content of the update, some settings may  
¾ Adjust the aerial reception with “DVB Manual Tuning” in the  
Setup menu. (> 59)  
have returned to the preset values. Fix the settings again.  
Picture very infrequently breaks up on some or  
all channels.  
¾ Electrical atmospheric interference caused by local or distant  
lighting storms or heavy rain with wind in “leafy” locations may  
cause pictures to break up and audio to mute or distort  
momentarily.  
¾ Impulse noise interference from an infrequently used electrical  
appliance, or a passing vehicle or lawn mower with a “noisy”  
ignition system.  
VIERA Link  
VIERA Link doesn’t work.  
¾ Check the HDMI cable connection. Check that “HDMI” is  
displayed on the front display when the power for the main unit  
is set to On.  
¾ Make sure that “VIERA Link” is set to “On”. (> 63)  
¾ Check the “HDAVI Control” settings on the connected device.  
¾ Some functions may not work if depending on the version of  
“HDAVI Control” of the connected equipment. This unit supports  
“HDAVI Control 4” functions.  
¾ If the connection for the equipment connected with HDMI was  
changed, or if there was a power failure or the plug was  
removed from the household mains socket, “HDAVI Control”  
may not work.  
In this case, perform the following operations.  
1
When the HDMI cable is connected to all equipment with the  
power on, turn the TV (VIERA) on again.  
2
Change the TV (VIERA) settings for the “HDAVI Control”  
function to off, and then set to on again. (For more  
information, see the VIERA operating instructions.)  
Switch the VIERA input to HDMI connection with this unit,  
and after this unit’s screen is displayed check that “HDAVI  
Control” is working.  
3
RQT9306  
79  
Specifications  
Recording system  
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format  
DVD-R : DVD-Video format  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format  
Video  
Video system:  
PAL colour signal, 625 lines, 50 fields  
NTSC colour signal, 525 lines, 60 fields  
MPEG2 (Hybrid VBR)  
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format  
+R  
+R DL (Double Layer)  
+RW  
Recording system:  
Video in (PAL/NTSC):  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
S-Video in (PAL/NTSC):  
Recordable discs  
DVD-RAM:  
AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
Video out (PAL/NTSC):  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Video Out (pin jack) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
S-Video out (PAL/NTSC):  
AV1 (21 pin), S-Video Out (S terminal) 1 Vp-p 75 , termination  
RGB out (PAL/NTSC):  
2X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),  
2-3X SPEED (Ver. 2.1), 2-5X SPEED (Ver. 2.2)  
1X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-4X SPEED (Ver. 2.0),  
1-8X SPEED (Ver. 2.0), 1-16X SPEED (Ver. 2.1)  
DVD-R:  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer): 2-4X SPEED (Ver. 3.0), 2-8X SPEED (Ver. 3.0)  
DVD-RW:  
1X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 1-2X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),  
2-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2-6X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1),  
2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.2), 2.4-16X SPEED (Ver. 1.3)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.0), 2.4-8X SPEED (Ver. 1.1)  
2.4X SPEED (Ver. 1.1), 2.4-4X SPEED (Ver. 1.2)  
AV1 (21 pin) 0.7 Vp-p (PAL) 75 , termination  
+R:  
Component video output (NTSC 480p/480i, PAL 576p/576i)  
Y: 1.0 Vp-p 75 , termination  
+R DL:  
+RW:  
PB: 0.7 Vp-p 75 , termination  
PR: 0.7 Vp-p 75 , termination  
Television system  
Recording time  
Maximum 8 hours (using 4.7 GB disc)  
XP: Approx. 1 hour, SP: Approx. 2 hours  
LP: Approx. 4 hours, EP: Approx. 6 hours/8 hours  
Tuner system  
PAL–B  
Australia  
Channel coverage  
VHF: 0 to 12  
UHF: 28 to 69  
Maximum Approx. 441 hours with 250 GB HDD (EP 8 hours mode)  
XP: Approx. 55 hours, SP: Approx. 110 hours  
CATV: 45 MHz to 470 MHz  
LP: Approx. 221 hours, EP: Approx. 331 hours/441 hours  
DVB–T  
Australia  
VHF: 6 to 12  
UHF: 27 to 69  
Playable discs  
DVD-RAM : DVD Video Recording format  
DVD-R : DVD-Video format, MP3§1, WMA§1, JPEG§1, DivX§1  
DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) : DVD-Video format,  
MP3§1, WMA§1, JPEG§1, DivX§1  
DVD-RW : DVD-Video format, DVD Video Recording format  
+R, +R DL (Double Layer), +RW  
RF converter output:  
Not provided  
DV input  
IEEE 1394 Standard, 4 pin : 1 pc  
USB port  
USB standard:  
Format:  
Type A : 1 pc  
USB 2.0 High Speed  
FAT16, FAT32  
DVD-Video, CD-Audio (CD-DA), Video CD  
1
Video (SD Video)§2  
Codec:  
File Format:  
CD-R/CD-RW : CD-DA§1, Video CD§1, MP3§1, WMA§  
,
1
MPEG2 (SD-Video Entertainment Video Profile)  
SD-Video format conforming  
JPEG§1, DivX§  
Others  
Region code:  
Internal HDD capacity  
Optical pick-up  
250 GB  
4  
Operating temperature:  
Operating humidity range:  
Power supply:  
Power consumption:  
Dimensions (WkHkD):  
Mass:  
5 oC to 40 oC  
10 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)  
AC 220 to 240 V, 50 Hz  
Approx. 36 W  
System with 1 lens, 2 integration units  
(662 nm wavelength for DVDs, 780 nm wavelength for CDs)  
LASER specification  
Class 1 LASER Product (Pickup)  
Wave length:  
430 mmk59 mmk326 mm  
Approx. 4.2 kg  
CD  
780 nm wave length  
662 nm wave length  
Power consumption in standby mode:  
Approx. 2 W (“Power Save” is set to “On”)  
Approx. 15 W (“Power Save” is set to “Off”)  
DVD  
Laser power:  
No hazardous radiation is emitted with the safety protection  
Note  
Audio  
Recording system:  
Audio in:  
Input level:  
Input impedance:  
Audio out:  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Dolby Digital 2ch, Linear PCM (XP mode)  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), AV3/AV4 (pin jack)  
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz  
More than 10 k≠  
AV1/AV2 (21 pin), Audio Out (pin jack)  
Standard: 0.5 Vrms, Full scale: 2.0 Vrms at 1 kHz  
Less than 1 k≠  
§1 Finalising is necessary for compatible playback.  
§2 Video Recording conversion and transfer is possible from USB to  
HDD or DVD-RAM disc.  
After Video Recording conversion and transfer to HDD or DVD-  
RAM disc, the playback is possible.  
Output level:  
Output impedance:  
Digital audio out: Optical terminal (PCM, Dolby Digital, DTS, MPEG)  
HDMI Output  
19 pin type A: 1 pc  
HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour)  
This unit supports “HDAVI Control 4” function.  
RQT9306  
80  
Glossary  
Bitstream  
Formatting  
This is the digital form of multi-channel audio data (e.g., 5.1 channel)  
before it is decoded into its various channels.  
Formatting is the process of making media such as DVD-RAM  
recordable on recording equipment.  
You can format DVD-RAM, DVD-RW (only as DVD-Video format),  
+RW and the HDD or unused +R and +R DL on this unit.  
Formatting permanently deletes all contents.  
CPRM (Content Protection for Recordable Media)  
CPRM is technology used to protect broadcasts that are allowed to  
be recorded only once. Such broadcasts can be recorded only with  
CPRM compatible recorders and discs.  
Frames and fields  
Frames refer to the single images that constitute the video you see  
on your television. Each frame consists of two fields.  
Decoder  
A decoder restores the coded audio signals on DVDs to normal. This  
is called decoding.  
Deep Colour  
This unit incorporates HDMITM (V.1.3a with Deep Colour) technology  
that can reproduce greater colour gradation (4096 steps) when  
connected to a compatible TV. You can enjoy exceptionally rich,  
natural-looking colours, with smooth, detailed gradation and minimal  
colour banding. [A lower colour gradation (256 steps), without Deep  
Colour, will be reproduced if connected to a TV which does not  
support Deep Colour. The unit will automatically set appropriate  
output to suit the connected TV.]  
u
r
Frame  
Field  
Field  
A frame still shows two fields, so there may be some blurring, but  
picture quality is generally better.  
A field still shows less picture information so it may be rougher, but  
there is no blurring.  
HDD (Hard disk drive)  
DivX  
This is a mass data storage device used in computers, etc. A disk  
with a surface that has been treated with magnetic fluid is spun and  
a magnetic head is brought in close proximity to facilitate the reading  
and writing of large amounts of data at high speed.  
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX  
media files contain highly compressed video with high visual quality  
that maintains a relatively small file size.  
Dolby Digital  
This is a method of coding digital signals developed by Dolby  
Laboratories. Apart from stereo (2-channel) audio, these signals can  
also be multi-channel audio. A large amount of audio information  
can be recorded on one disc using this method.  
When recording on this unit Dolby Digital (2 channel) is the default  
audio.  
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)  
Unlike conventional connections, it transmits uncompressed digital  
video and audio signals on a single cable. This unit supports high-  
definition video output [720p (750p), 1080i (1125i), 1080p (1125p)]  
from HDMI AV OUT terminals. To enjoy high-definition video a high  
definition compatible television is required.  
Down-mixing  
JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group)  
This is the process of remixing the multi-channel audio found on  
some discs into two channels. It is useful when you want to listen to  
the 5.1-channel audio recorded on DVDs through your television’s  
speakers. Some discs prohibit down-mixing and this unit can then  
only output the front two channels.  
This is a system used for compressing/decoding colour still pictures.  
If you select JPEG as the storage system on digital cameras, etc.,  
the data will be compressed to 1/10–1/100 of its original size. The  
benefit of JPEG is less deterioration in picture quality considering  
the degree of compression.  
Drive  
LPCM (Linear PCM)  
These are uncompressed digital signals, similar to those found on  
CDs.  
In the instance of this unit, this refers to the hard disk (HDD) and disc  
(DVD). These perform the reading and writing of data.  
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)  
MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group)  
This surround system is used in many movie theaters. There is good  
separation between the channels, so realistic sound effects are  
possible.  
A standard for efficiently compressing and expanding colour video.  
MPEG2 is a compression standard used for DVD and satellite based  
digital broadcasting. This unit records programmes using MPEG2.  
SD Video files shot with a Panasonic SD video camera, etc. can be  
copied to the HDD or a DVD-RAM disc.  
Dynamic range  
Dynamic range is the difference between the lowest level of sound  
that can be heard above the noise of the equipment and the highest  
level of sound before distortion occurs.  
Dynamic range compression means reducing the gap between the  
loudest and softest sounds. This means you can listen at low  
volumes but still hear dialogue clearly.  
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3)  
An audio compression method that compresses audio to  
approximately one tenth of its size without any considerable loss of  
audio quality.  
Pan&Scan/Letterbox  
Film and video  
In general, DVD-Video are produced with the intention that they be  
viewed on a widescreen television (16:9 aspect ratio), so images  
often don’t fit regular (4:3 aspect ratio) televisions. Two styles of  
picture, “Pan & Scan” and “Letterbox”, deal with this problem.  
DVD-Videos are recorded using either film or video. This unit can  
determine which type has been used, then uses the most suitable  
method of progressive output.  
Film:  
Recorded at 25 frames per second (PAL discs) or 24  
frames per second (NTSC discs). (NTSC discs  
recorded at 30 frames per second as well.)  
Generally appropriate for motion picture films.  
Recorded at 25 frames/50 fields per second. (PAL  
discs) or 30 frames/60 fields per second (NTSC discs).  
Generally appropriate for TV drama programmes or  
animation.  
Pan & Scan: The sides are cut off so the picture  
fills the screen.  
Video:  
Letterbox:  
Black bands appear at the top and  
bottom of the picture so the picture  
itself appears in an aspect ratio of  
16:9.  
Finalise  
A process that makes play of a recorded CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-R,  
etc. possible on equipment that can play such media. You can  
finalise DVD-R, DVD-R DL, DVD-RW (DVD-Video format), +R, +R  
DL on this unit.  
Playback control (PBC)  
If a Video CD has playback control, you can select scenes and  
information with menus.  
(This unit is compatible with version 2.0 and 1.1.)  
After finalising, the disc becomes play-only and you can no longer  
record or edit. However, finalised DVD-RW can be formatted for  
recording again.  
Progressive/Interlace  
The PAL video signal standard has 576 (or 625) interlaced (i) scan  
lines, whereas progressive scanning, called 576p (or 625p), uses  
twice the number of scan lines. For the NTSC standard, these are  
called 480i (or 525i) and 480p (or 525p) respectively.  
Using progressive output, you can enjoy the high-resolution video  
recorded on media such as DVD-Video.  
Folder  
This is a place on the hard disk or disc where groups of data are  
stored together. In the case of this unit, it refers to the place where  
still pictures (JPEG) and MPEG2 are stored.  
Your television must be compatible to enjoy progressive video.  
Panasonic televisions with 576 (625)/50i · 50p, 480 (525)/60i · 60p  
input terminals are progressive compatible.  
RQT9306  
81  
Glossary  
Gracenote® Corporate Description  
Protection  
You can prevent accidental deletion by setting writing protection or  
deletion protection.  
Music recognition technology and related data are provided by  
Gracenote®. Gracenote is the industry standard in music  
recognition technology and related content delivery.  
RGB  
This refers to the three primary colours of light, red (R), green (G),  
and blue (B) and also the method of producing video that uses them.  
By dividing the video signal into the three colours for transmission,  
noise is reduced for even higher quality images.  
Gracenote® Proprietary Legends  
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright ©  
2000–2009 Gracenote. Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000–  
2009 Gracenote. This product and service may practice one or  
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525; #6,061,680;  
#6,154,773, #6,161,132, #6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,  
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pending. Some services  
supplied under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent:  
#6,304,523.  
Sampling frequency  
Sampling is the process of converting the heights of sound wave  
(analog signal) samples taken at set periods into digits (digital  
encoding). Sampling frequency is the number of samples taken per  
second, so larger numbers mean more faithful reproduction of the  
original sound.  
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks of Gracenote.  
The Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by  
Gracenote” logo are trademarks of Gracenote.  
Signal Quality  
This is the guide for checking the aerial direction. The numbered  
values displayed do not indicate the strength of the signal, but the  
quality of the signal (the signal to noise ratio, or “S/N”). The channels  
you can receive are affected by weather conditions, seasons, time  
(day/night), region, length of the cable that is connected to the aerial,  
etc.  
Gracenote® End-User License Agreement  
Thumbnail  
This refers to a miniature representation of a picture used to display  
multiple pictures in the form of a list.  
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEPTANCE OF THE  
TERMS BELOW.  
This application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of  
Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote  
(the “Gracenote Software”) enables this application to perform disc  
and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,  
including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”)  
from online servers or embedded databases (collectively,  
“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions. You may use  
Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions  
of this application or device.  
WMA  
WMA is a compression format developed by Microsoft Corporation.  
It achieves the same sound quality as MP3 with a file size that is  
smaller than that of MP3.  
1080i  
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) alternating scan lines pass  
every 1/50th of a second to create an interlace image. Because  
1080i (1125i) more than doubles current television broadcasts of  
480i (525i), the detail is much clearer and creates a more realistic  
and rich image.  
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote  
Software, and Gracenote Servers for your own personal non-  
commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or  
transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third  
party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE  
DATA, THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE  
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED HEREIN.  
1080p  
In one high definition image, 1080 (1125) scan lines pass at the  
same time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image.  
Since progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace,  
there is a minimal amount of screen flicker.  
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote  
Data, the Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers will terminate  
if you violate these restrictions. If your license terminates, you agree  
to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote  
Software, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in  
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and the Gracenote  
Servers, including all ownership rights. Under no circumstances will  
Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any information  
that you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its  
rights under this Agreement against you directly in its own name.  
720p  
In one high definition image, 720 (750) scan lines pass at the same  
time every 1/50th of a second to create a progressive image. Since  
progressive video does not alternate scan lines like interlace, there  
is a minimal amount of screen flicker.  
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.  
Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby  
Laboratories.  
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for  
statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric  
identifier is to allow the Gracenote service to count queries without  
knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see the  
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote  
service.  
Manufactured under license under U.S. Patent #’s: 5,451,942;  
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 & other U.S. and  
worldwide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS 2.0 + Digital  
Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol  
are trademarks of DTS, Inc. © 1996-2008 DTS, Inc. All Rights  
Reserved.  
The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are  
licensed to you “AS IS.”  
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is  
protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights.  
Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized  
by Macrovision, and is intended for home and other limited  
viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision.  
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.  
Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or  
implied, regarding the accuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the  
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from  
the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any cause  
that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the  
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are error-free or that  
functioning of Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers will be  
uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with new  
enhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may  
provide in the future and is free to discontinue its services at any  
time.  
Plays DivX® video  
DivX® is a registered trademark of DivX, Inc., and is used under  
license.  
HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia Interface  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.  
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.  
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THAT WILL  
BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE  
OR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL  
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL OR  
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST  
REVENUES.  
HDAVI Control™ is a trademark of Panasonic Corporation.  
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United  
States and/or other countries.  
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of  
Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of  
such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a  
license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and  
third parties.  
RQT9306  
82  
3DQDVRQLFꢀ:DUUDQW\ꢀ  
ꢀꢁꢂ 7KHꢂ SURGXFWꢂ LVꢂ ZDUUDQWHGꢂ IRUꢂ ꢀꢃꢂ PRQWKVꢂ IURPꢂ WKHꢂ GDWHꢂ RIꢂ SXUFKDVHꢁꢂ 6XEMHFWꢂ WRꢂ WKHꢂ FRQGLWLRQVꢂ RIꢂ WKLVꢂ ZDUUDQW\ꢂ  
3DQDVRQLFꢂRUꢂLWꢄVꢂ$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢂZLOOꢂSHUIRUPꢂQHFHVVDU\ꢂVHUYLFHꢂRQꢂWKHꢂSURGXFWꢂZLWKRXWꢂFKDUJHꢂIRUꢂSDUWVꢂ  
RUꢂODERXUꢂLIꢅꢂLQꢂWKHꢂRSLQLRQꢂRIꢂ3DQDVRQLFꢅꢂWKHꢂSURGXFWꢂLVꢂIRXQGꢂWRꢂEHꢂIDXOW\ꢂZLWKLQꢂWKHꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂSHULRGꢁꢂ  
ꢃꢁꢂ 7KLVZDUUDQW\RQO\DSSOLHVWR3DQDVRQLFSURGXFWVSXUFKDVHGLQ$XVWUDOLDDQGVROGE\3DQDVRQLF$XVWUDOLDRULWVꢂ  
$XWKRULVHGꢂ 'LVWULEXWRUVꢂ RUꢂ 'HDOHUVꢂ DQGꢂ RQO\ꢂ ZKHUHꢂ WKHꢂ SURGXFWVꢂ DUHꢂ XVHGꢂ DQGꢂ VHUYLFHGꢂ ZLWKLQꢂ $XVWUDOLDꢂ RUꢂ LWꢄVꢂ  
WHUULWRULHVꢁꢂ:DUUDQW\ꢂFRYHUꢂRQO\ꢂDSSOLHVꢂWRꢂVHUYLFHꢂFDUULHGꢂRXWꢂE\ꢂDꢂ3DQDVRQLFꢂ$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢂDQGꢂRQO\ꢂ  
LIꢂYDOLGꢂSURRIꢂRIꢂSXUFKDVHꢂLVꢂSUHVHQWHGꢂZKHQꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂVHUYLFHꢂLVꢂUHTXHVWHGꢁꢂ  
ꢆꢁꢂ 7KLVꢂ ZDUUDQW\ꢂ RQO\ꢂ DSSOLHVꢂ LIꢂ WKHꢂ SURGXFWꢂ KDVꢂ EHHQꢂ LQVWDOOHGꢂ DQGꢂ XVHGꢂ LQꢂ DFFRUGDQFHꢂ ZLWKꢂ WKHꢂ PDQXIDFWXUHU¶Vꢂ  
UHFRPPHQGDWLRQVꢂꢇDVꢂQRWHGꢂLQꢂWKHꢂRSHUDWLQJꢂLQVWUXFWLRQVꢈꢂXQGHUꢂQRUPDOꢂXVHꢂDQGꢂUHDVRQDEOHꢂFDUHꢂꢇLQꢂWKHꢂRSLQLRQꢂRIꢂ  
3DQDVRQLFꢈꢁ7KHZDUUDQW\FRYHUVQRUPDOGRPHVWLFXVHRQO\DQGGRHVQRWFRYHUGDPDJHꢅPDOIXQFWLRQRUIDLOXUHꢂ  
UHVXOWLQJIURPXVHRILQFRUUHFWYROWDJHVꢅLQFRUUHFWLQVWDOODWLRQꢅDFFLGHQWꢅPLVXVHꢅQHJOHFWꢅEXLOGꢉXSRIGLUWRUGXVWꢅꢂ  
DEXVHꢅꢂPDODGMXVWPHQWꢂRIꢂFXVWRPHUꢂFRQWUROVꢅꢂPDLQVꢂVXSSO\ꢂSUREOHPVꢅꢂWKXQGHUVWRUPꢂDFWLYLW\ꢅꢂLQIHVWDWLRQꢂE\ꢂLQVHFWVꢂ  
RUꢂ YHUPLQꢅꢂ WDPSHULQJꢂ RUꢂ UHSDLUꢂ E\ꢂ XQDXWKRULVHGꢂ SHUVRQVꢂ ꢇLQFOXGLQJꢂ XQDXWKRULVHGꢂ DOWHUDWLRQVꢈꢅꢂ H[SRVXUHꢂ WRꢂ  
DEQRUPDOO\ꢂFRUURVLYHꢂFRQGLWLRQVꢂRUꢂDQ\ꢂIRUHLJQꢂREMHFWꢂRUꢂPDWWHUꢂKDYLQJꢂHQWHUHGꢂWKHꢂSURGXFWꢁꢂ  
ꢊꢁꢂ 7KLVꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂGRHVꢂQRWꢂFRYHUꢂWKHꢂIROORZLQJꢂLWHPVꢂXQOHVVꢂWKHꢂIDXOWꢂRUꢂGHIHFWꢂH[LVWHGꢂDWꢂWKHꢂWLPHꢂRIꢂSXUFKDVHꢋꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ  
ꢇDꢈꢂ9LGHRꢂRUꢂ$XGLRꢂ7DSHVꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ  
ꢇHꢈꢂ&DELQHWꢂ3DUWꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ ꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ  
ꢇEꢈꢂ'9'ꢂ9LGHRꢅꢂ%OXꢂ5D\ꢅꢂRUꢂ5HFRUGDEOHꢂ'LVFVꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ ꢇIꢈꢂ,QIRUPDWLRQꢂVWRUHGꢂRQꢂWKHꢂ+DUGꢂ'LVNꢂ'ULYHꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ  
ꢇFꢈꢂ6'ꢂFDUGVꢂRUꢂ86%ꢂGHYLFHVꢂ ꢇJꢈꢂ8VHUꢂUHSODFHDEOHꢂ%DWWHULHVꢂꢂꢂ  
ꢇGꢈꢂ9LGHRꢂRUꢂDXGLRꢂ+HDGVꢂIURPꢂZHDUꢂDQGꢂWHDUꢂLQꢂQRUPDOꢂXVHꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ  
ꢌꢁꢂ 6RPHꢂSURGXFWVꢂPD\ꢂEHꢂVXSSOLHGꢂZLWKꢂHWKHUQHWꢂFRQQHFWLRQꢂKDUGZDUHꢁꢂ7KHꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂLVꢂOLPLWHGꢂRQꢂVXFKꢂSURGXFWVꢂDQGꢂ  
ZLOOꢂQRWꢂFRYHUꢂ  
ꢇDꢈꢂ,QWHUQHW FRQQHFWLRQꢂUHODWHGꢂSUREOHPVꢂ  
ꢀEꢁ $FFHVVꢂIHHVꢂRUꢂFKDUJHVꢂLQFXUUHGꢂIRUꢂWKHꢂLQWHUQHW  
ꢀFꢁꢂ WKHꢂXVHꢂRIꢂLQFRPSDWLEOHꢂVRIWZDUHꢂRUꢂVRIWZDUHꢂQRWꢂVSHFLILFDOO\ꢂVWLSXODWHGꢂLQꢂWKHꢂSURGXFWꢂRSHUDWLRQVꢂPDQXDOꢍꢂDQG  
ꢀGꢁ DQ\ꢂLQGLUHFWꢂRUꢂFRQVHTXHQWLDOꢂFRVWVꢂDVVRFLDWHGꢂZLWKꢂWKHꢂLQFRUUHFWꢂXVHꢂRUꢂPLVXVHꢂRIꢂWKHꢂKDUGZDUHꢅꢂLWVꢂFRQQHFWLRQꢂ  
WRꢂWKHꢂLQWHUQHWꢂRUꢂDQ\ꢂRWKHUꢂGHYLFHꢁꢂ  
ꢂꢂ  
ꢎꢁꢂ ,IꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂVHUYLFHꢂLVꢂUHTXLUHGꢂ\RXꢂVKRXOGꢋꢂ  
xꢂ 7HOHSKRQH3DQDVRQLF¶Vꢂ &XVWRPHUꢂ &DUHꢂ &HQWUHRQꢆꢃꢎꢏꢏRUYLVLWꢂ RXUZHEVLWHꢂ DQGꢂ XVHꢂ WKHꢂ 6HUYLFH&HQWUHꢂ  
/RFDWRUꢂIRUꢂWKHꢂQDPHꢐDGGUHVVꢂRIꢂWKHꢂQHDUHVWꢂ$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢁꢂ  
xꢂ 6HQGꢂ RUꢂ EULQJꢂ WKHꢂ SURGXFWꢂ WRꢂ Dꢂ 3DQDVRQLFꢂ $XWKRULVHGꢂ 6HUYLFHꢂ &HQWUHꢂ WRJHWKHUꢂ ZLWKꢂ \RXUꢂ SURRIꢂ RIꢂ SXUFKDVHꢂ  
UHFHLSWꢂ DVꢂ Dꢂ SURRIꢂ RIꢂ SXUFKDVHꢂ GDWHꢁꢂ 3OHDVHꢂ QRWHꢂ WKDWꢂ IUHLJKWꢂ DQGꢂ LQVXUDQFHꢂ WRꢂ DQGꢂ ꢐꢂ RUꢂ IURPꢂ \RXUꢂ QHDUHVWꢂ  
$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢂPXVWꢂEHꢂDUUDQJHGꢂE\ꢂ\RXꢁꢂ  
ꢑꢁꢂ 7KHZDUUDQWLHVKHUHE\FRQIHUUHGGRQRWH[WHQGWRꢅDQGH[FOXGHꢅDQ\FRVWVDVVRFLDWHGZLWKWKHLQVWDOODWLRQꢅGHꢉ  
LQVWDOODWLRQRUUHꢉLQVWDOODWLRQRIDSURGXFWꢅLQFOXGLQJFRVWVUHODWHGꢂWRꢂWKHꢂPRXQWLQJꢅꢂGHꢉPRXQWLQJꢂRUꢂUHPRXQWLQJꢂRIꢂ  
DQ\VFUHHQꢅDQGDQ\RWKHUDQFLOODU\DFWLYLWLHVꢈꢅGHOLYHU\ꢅKDQGOLQJꢅIUHLJKWLQJꢅWUDQVSRUWDWLRQRULQVXUDQFHRIWKHꢂ  
SURGXFWꢂRUꢂDQ\ꢂSDUWꢂWKHUHRIꢂRUꢂUHSODFHPHQWꢂRIꢂDQGꢂGRꢂQRWꢂH[WHQGꢂWRꢅꢂDQGꢂH[FOXGHꢅꢂDQ\ꢂGDPDJHꢂRUꢂORVVꢂRFFXUULQJꢂE\ꢂ  
UHDVRQꢂRIꢅꢂGXULQJꢅꢂDVVRFLDWHGꢂZLWKꢅꢂRUꢂUHODWHGꢂWRꢂVXFKꢂLQVWDOODWLRQꢅꢂGHꢉLQVWDOODWLRQꢅꢂUHꢉLQVWDOODWLRQꢂRUꢂWUDQVLWꢁꢂ  
3DQDVRQLFꢂ$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHVꢂDUHꢂORFDWHGꢂLQꢂPDMRUꢂPHWURSROLWDQꢂDUHDVꢂDQGꢂPRVWꢂUHJLRQDOꢂFHQWUHVꢂRIꢂ$XVWUDOLDꢅꢂ  
KRZHYHUꢅꢂFRYHUDJHꢂZLOOꢂYDU\ꢂGHSHQGDQWꢂRQꢂSURGXFWꢁꢂ)RUꢂDGYLFHꢂRQꢂH[DFWꢂ$XWKRULVHGꢂ6HUYLFHꢂ&HQWUHꢂORFDWLRQVꢂIRUꢂ\RXUꢂ  
SURGXFWꢅSOHDVHWHOHSKRQHRXUꢂ &XVWRPHUꢂ &DUHꢂ &HQWUHꢂ RQꢆꢃꢎꢏꢏRUꢂ YLVLWꢂ RXUꢂ ZHEVLWHꢂ DQGꢂ XVHꢂ WKHꢂ 6HUYLFH&HQWUHꢂ  
/RFDWRUꢁꢂ  
8QOHVVꢂRWKHUZLVHꢂVSHFLILHGꢂWRꢂWKHꢂFRQVXPHUꢂWKHꢂEHQHILWVꢂFRQIHUUHGꢂE\ꢂWKLVꢂH[SUHVVꢂZDUUDQW\ꢂDUHꢂDGGLWLRQDOꢂWRꢂDOOꢂRWKHUꢂ  
FRQGLWLRQVꢅZDUUDQWLHVꢅJXDUDQWHHVꢅULJKWVDQGUHPHGLHVH[SUHVVHGRULPSOLHGE\WKH7UDGH3UDFWLFHV$FWꢂꢃꢄDQGꢂ  
VLPLODUꢂFRQVXPHUꢂSURWHFWLRQꢂSURYLVLRQVꢂFRQWDLQHGꢂLQꢂOHJLVODWLRQꢂRIꢂWKHꢂ6WDWHVꢂDQGꢂ7HUULWRULHVꢂDQGꢂDOOꢂRWKHUꢂREOLJDWLRQVꢂ  
DQGOLDELOLWLHVRQWKHSDUWRIWKHPDQXIDFWXUHURUVXSSOLHUDQGQRWKLQJFRQWDLQHGKHUHLQVKDOOUHVWULFWRUPRGLI\VXFKꢂ  
ULJKWVꢅꢂUHPHGLHVꢅꢂREOLJDWLRQVꢂRUꢂOLDELOLWLHVꢁꢂ  
0D\ꢀꢅꢆꢆꢇ  
7+,6ꢀ:$55$17<ꢀ&$5'ꢀ$1'ꢀ7+(ꢀ385&+$6(ꢀ'2&.(7ꢀꢁ25ꢀ6,0,/$5ꢀ3522)ꢀ2)ꢀ385&+$6(ꢂꢀ  
6+28/'ꢀ%(ꢀ5(7$,1('ꢀ%<ꢀ7+(ꢀ&86720(5ꢀ$7ꢀ$//ꢀ7,0(6  
,Iꢀ\RXꢀUHTXLUHꢀDVVLVWDQFHꢀUHJDUGLQJꢀZDUUDQW\ꢀFRQGLWLRQVꢀRUꢀDQ\ꢀRWKHUꢀHQTXLULHVꢁꢀ  
SOHDVHꢀFRQWDFWꢀRXUꢀ&XVWRPHUꢀ&DUHꢀ&HQWUHꢀYLDꢀWKHꢀ3DQDVRQLFꢀZHEVLWHꢀZZZꢂSDQDVRQLFꢂFRPꢂDXꢀꢀRUꢀ  
E\ꢀSKRQHꢀRQꢀꢃꢄꢅꢀꢆꢇꢇꢂꢀ,IꢀSKRQLQJꢀLQꢁꢀSOHDVHꢀHQVXUHꢀ\RXꢀKDYHꢀ\RXUꢀRSHUDWLQJꢀLQVWUXFWLRQVꢀDYDLODEOHꢂꢀ  
3DQDVRQLFꢀ$XVWUDOLDꢀ3W\ꢁꢀ/LPLWHGꢀ  
$&1ꢂꢏꢏꢀꢂꢌꢒꢃꢂꢀꢓꢑꢂꢂꢂ$%1ꢂꢓꢆꢂꢏꢏꢀꢂꢌꢒꢃꢂꢀꢓꢑ  
/RFNHGꢂ%DJꢂꢌꢏꢌꢅꢂ)UHQFKVꢂ)RUHVWꢅꢂ16:ꢂꢃꢏꢓꢎꢂ  
352ꢉꢏꢆꢀꢉ)ꢀꢀꢂꢂ,VVXHꢋꢂꢀꢁꢏꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂ  
ꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢂꢃꢒꢉꢏꢌꢉꢃꢏꢏꢓ  
54$ꢏꢃꢊꢌ  
RQT9306  
83  
Index  
Adjust the audio quality  
(Sound menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Adjust the picture quality  
(Picture menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Album (Music)  
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Album (Still picture)  
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Audio  
Digital broadcast (DVB Multi Audio) . . . 55  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Auto Renewal Recording . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
AV2 Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Edit  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Ratings level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Aspect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 61  
Auto Renewal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 23–27  
Relief Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Remote control code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Repeat Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 54  
Resume play function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Enabling discs to be played on other  
equipment - Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
Finalise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58, 81  
Flexible Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57, 81  
FR (Flexible Recording Mode) . . . 20, 21  
FUNCTION MENU Display . . . . . . . . 7, 35  
G-CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Screen Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Select channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Setup menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Simultaneous rec and play . . . . . . . . . 21  
Slideshow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61  
Still picture  
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Subtitle  
Gracenote® database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
HDAVI Control . . . . . . . . 8, 36–37, 63, 67  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 63, 67, 81  
High Speed Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Change Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Channel  
Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59, 60  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 38  
Chapter Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38, 61  
Chasing playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Child Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Cleaning  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Main unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5  
Clock Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Connection  
Aerial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 68, 69  
Amplifier, receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
DV input terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
HDMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 67  
Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 66–69  
Video cassette recorder . . . . . . . . . 68, 69  
Copy  
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
SD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
Title/Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Copy (playlist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
CPRM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81  
Create Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28, 39  
Create playlists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
JPEG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 32–33, 81  
Language  
Code list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Disc menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Soundtrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61  
Subtitle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61  
LPCM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 81  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 61  
Switch the audio/subtitles on the disc  
(Disc menu) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Manual Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Menu  
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30–31  
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Mode  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20  
Still Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31  
Music on HDD  
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Time Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Timer recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 23–27  
Tuning  
Analogue broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Digital broadcast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
TV Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17, 26  
TV System (PAL/NTSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
USB  
Copy (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Copy (SD Video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Copy (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13  
Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Supported formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
Name  
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Entering text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23, 39  
New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 62  
Delete  
VIERA Link . . . . . . . . . . . 8, 36–37, 63, 67  
Album (Music) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
All titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 41  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
Digital Audio Output settings . . . . 62, 63  
Digital broadcast  
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 14  
DVB Multi Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
New Channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 62  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Select the channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Signal Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
System Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
DIRECT NAVIGATOR . . . . . 29, 32, 38, 42  
Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10–11  
Display  
Partial Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Pause Live TV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
VIERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Power Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64  
Progressive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54, 63, 81  
Properties  
Music on HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33, 42  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Protection  
Album (Still picture) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Cartridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Disc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
Still picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Digital channel information . . . . . . . . . . 14  
Status messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Divide Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
DivX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 30–31, 81  
DV automatic recording . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
DVB Multi Audio  
Quick View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Select audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Panasonic Corporation  
p
RQT9306-L  
F0309ST0  

Intel Computer Hardware Core 2 User Manual
Jenn Air W10298937A User Manual
JVC IF C51SDG User Manual
JVC InteriArt AV 32H47SU User Manual
Lincoln Impinger Conveyor Ovens 1451 User Manual
Memorex 5395 8531 User Manual
Motorola MA352 User Manual
NEC PD17062 User Manual
Philips M100D User Manual
Philips Magnavox TS2556C User Manual